city of labelle membrane water treatment facility ... - DN Higgins, Inc.

CITY OF LABELLE 

MEMBRANE WATER TREATMENT FACILITY 

PROJECT MANUAL 

VOLUME 2 

MEMBRANE BUILDING ARCHITECTURAL 

Prepared For: 

City of LaBelle, Florida 

481 Highway 80 West 

LaBelle, Florida 33935 

Prepared By: 

411 Pablo Avenue 

Jacksonville Beach, Florida 32250 

(904) 249-8009 

Certificate of Authorization #00004669 

DECEMBER 2011

CITY OF LABELLE, FLORIDA 

MEMBRANE WATER TREATMENT FACILITY 

PROJECT MANUAL 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

VOLUME 2 – MEMBRANE BUILDING ARCHITECTURAL 

DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 

Reference Volume 1 of Project Manual 

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

Reference Volume 1 of Project Manual 

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 

SECTIONS 

02361 Termite Control 

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 

SECTIONS 

03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 

SECTIONS 

04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 

-i- 

99-326 100% Submittal 

CITY OF LABELLE MEMBRANE WTF December 2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.) 


DIVISION 5 – METALS 

SECTIONS 

05120 Structural Steel 

05210 Steel Joists 

05310 Steel Decking 

05530 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Molded Grating 

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 

SECTIONS 

06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry 

06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

SECTIONS 

07170 Bentonite Panel Waterproofing 

07210 Thermal Insulation 

07220 Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Insulation 

07411 Metal Roof Panels 

07552 SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems 

07920 Joint Sealants 

-ii- 





DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 

SECTIONS 

08111 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 

08211 Flush Wood Doors 

08311 Access Doors and Frames 

08332 Overhead Coiling Doors 

08412 Impact Resistant Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 

08710 Door Hardware 

08800 Glazing 

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

SECTIONS 

09111 Non-Structural Metal Framing 

09220 Portland Cement Plaster 

09250 Gypsum Board 

09310 Tiling 

09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 

09912 Painting (Professional Line Products) 

09960 High Performance Coatings 

DIVISON 10 – SPECIALTIES 

SECTIONS 

10200 Louvers and Vents 

10431 Signs 

-iii- 





10520 Fire Protection Specialties 

10530 Prefabricated Aluminum Walkway Covers 

10700 Exterior Sun Control Devices 

10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories 

DIVISON 11 – EQUIPMENT 

SECTIONS 

11451 Residential Appliances 

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 

SECTIONS 

12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds 

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

Not Used 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

Not Used 

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 

SECTIONS 

15400 Plumbing 

15500 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 

-iv- 





DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 

SECTIONS 

16000 Electrical 

-v- 



SECTION 02361 

TERMITE CONTROL 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following for termite control: 

1. Soil treatment. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency. 

B. PCO: Pest control operator. 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where 

Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment 

similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful inservice 

performance. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal 

registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water 

saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with 

EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.7 COORDINATION 

02361-1 

99-326 Bid Final 

CITY OF LABELLE MEMBRANE WTF April 7, 2011

Termite Control 

A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and 

concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported 

slabs, before construction. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that 

dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use 

only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required 

for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration 

allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance 

with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and 

foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite 

control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 

and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all 

extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, 

tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and 

around foundations. 

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials 

that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and 

level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. 

Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended 

by termiticide manufacturer. 

C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, 

complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

02361-2 



Termite Control 

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction 

and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 

3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT 

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide 

quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified 

concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the 

following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone 

is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 

1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, 

building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials 

before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 

2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of 

foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing 

pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers 

and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil 

washout around footings. 

3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. 

Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, ramps, and equipment 

bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and ramps 

are on fill or ground. 

4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be 

penetrated. 

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until 

completely dry. 

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until 

ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA- 

Registered Label instructions. 

D. Post warning signs in areas of application. 

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, 

landscaping, or other construction activities following application. 

END OF SECTION 02361 

02361-3 



SECTION 033000 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete 

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, 

and placement. 

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Welding certificates. 

B. Material certificates. 

C. Material test reports. 

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed 

concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for 

production facilities and equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed 

Concrete Production Facilities." 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to 

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 

AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." 

03300-1 



D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the 

Contract Documents: 

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

PRODUCTS 

1.5 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, 

true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize 

number of joints. 

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved 

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 

1.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. 

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from 

as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 

D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated 

from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets. 

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, 

and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture 

bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual 

of Standard Practice. 

1.7 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, 

brand, and source, throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I,. 

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 

03300-2 



. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded. 

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 

1.8 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible 

with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding 

those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures 

containing calcium chloride. 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, 

Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

1.9 WATERSTOPS 

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent 

passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and 

directional changes. 

1.10 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, B, or C. Include manufacturer's 

recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 

1.11 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 

A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less 

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of 

inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that 

penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 

C. Products: Provide Conspec by Dayton Superior; Intraseal or approved equivalent. 

Product must include a minimum 10 year warranty. 

03300-3 



1.12 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for 

application to fresh concrete. 

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, 

weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlappolyethylene 

sheet. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, 

Class B, dissipating. 

1.13 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic 

fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. 

B. Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin 

with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 85 or greater per ASTM D 2240. 

1. Products: Provide MM-80/MM-80P semi-rigid epoxy joint filler by 

Metzger/McGuire Co. or approved equivalent. Color to be selected by Architect. 

1.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the 

basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, 

and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would 

otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in 

concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high 

temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated. 

2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch (8 inches for concrete with verified 

slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or 

plasticizing admixture). 

3. Air Content: 2.5 to 4.5 percent, at point of delivery. 

03300-4 



4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 

percent. 

1.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 

1.16 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery 

time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, 

reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 

EXECUTION 

1.17 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support 

vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be 

applied, until structure can support such loads. 

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, 

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

1.18 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining 

work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, 

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

1.19 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to 

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 

1.20 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

03300-5 



1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder 

before placing concrete. 

1.21 JOINTS 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of 

concrete. 

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, 

at locations indicated and as approved by Architect. 

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, 

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints as follows: 

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with 

shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into 

concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface 

and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at 

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade 

beams, and other locations, as indicated. 

E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

1.22 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and 

embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that 

no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams 

or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide 

construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to 

ACI 301. 

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. 

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 

1.23 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with 

tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that 

exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

03300-6 



1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, 

arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and 

patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified 

limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a 

coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. 

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed 

surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture 

matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed 

surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 

1.24 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, 

and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and 

bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile 

amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is 

small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill 

low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, 

smooth, granular texture. 

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete 

by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until 

surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth 

any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 

1. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and 

an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots 

and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch. 

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and 

elsewhere as indicated. 

1.25 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or 

hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for 

hot-weather protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if 

hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before 

03300-7 



and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions 

after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float 

finishing. 

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following 

methods: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides 

and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. 

Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during 

curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or 

roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to 

heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of 

coating and repair damage during curing period. 

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound 

without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing 

compound manufacturer. 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a 

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after 

initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. 

Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

1.26 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor 

treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants 

and complete surface repairs. 

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 

3. Do not apply when the air or surface temperatures are less than 40°F. 

4. Apply liquid onto surface to the point of rejection, scrubbing into surface until a 

gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove 

excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if 

surface is rough or porous. Do not let treated surfaces dry during application or 

coats. 

5. Puddles of liquid floor hardener shall be squeegeed out to prevent white residue 

from appearing on the surface. If residue appears, remove per manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

6. Maintenance cleaning of the floor should be accomplished with the use of a 

mechanical scrubber. 

03300-8 



1.27 JOINT FILLING 

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Products and installation shall be in compliance or exceed the joint filling criteria 

established in ACI 302 and ACI 360. 

1. Defer joint filling as long as possible to allow for maximum slab shrinkage and 

joint widening. As a minimum, joint filling shall not occur until concrete has aged 

at least six months and the facility is under permanent temperature control. 

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave 

contact faces of joint clean and dry. 

C. Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints at interior, exposed areas. 

Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. The use of a 

compressible foam backer rod is strictly prohibited. Significant deficiencies in 

workmanship, including less than proper filler depth, inadequate joint cleaning, 

concave filler profile, etc. shall require removal and replacement. 

1.28 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. 

Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's 

approval. 

1.29 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Testing agency shall report inspection results promptly in writing to Contractor and 

Architect. 

C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 

D. Additional inspecting at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 

PART 2 - END OF SECTION 033000 

03300-9 



SECTION 04810 

UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 

2. Mortar and grout. 

3. Reinforcing steel. 

4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 

5. Ties and anchors. 

6. Embedded flashing. 

7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping at 

openings in masonry walls. 

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit 

masonry. 


A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths (f' m ) at 

28 days. 



B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing 

bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete 

Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 

04810-1 




C. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance 

with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within 

standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 

1. Masonry units. 

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 

b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and 

calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 

2. Joint reinforcement. 

3. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and 

proportions of ingredients. 

1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with 

property specification. 

2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with 

compressive strength requirement. 


A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, 

including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious 

component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical 

to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a 

testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other 

means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in 

an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely 

tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting 

and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery 

containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal 

dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. 

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and 

accumulation of dirt and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills 

with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed 

masonry when construction is not in progress. 

04810-2 




1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover 

securely in place. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for 

at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to 

be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in 

contact with such masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by 

spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with 

painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain 

from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. 

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or 

coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit 

masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather 

construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature 

is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but 

not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. 

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements 

contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements 

apply to product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

one of the manufacturers specified. 

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage 

of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding 

limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including 

dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be 

exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 

2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) 

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 

04810-3 




1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, 

headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area 

compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 

2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal 

dimensions. 

2.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS 

A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying 

with requirements below. 

B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units 

in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or 

required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method used for 

concrete masonry units. 

C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with 

requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 

D. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam 

concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse 

grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-inplace 

lintels until cured. 

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime 

masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified 

requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as 

selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 

3. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by 

weight. 

4. Available Products: 

a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 

1) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 

2) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond. 

3) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime 

Cement. 

b. Colored Masonry Cement: 

1) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. 

2) Lafarge North America Inc.; Florida Custom Color Masonry. 

04810-4 




3) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Masonry Cement. 

B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural 

sand or crushed stone. 

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 

percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 

3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to 

produce required mortar color. 

C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

D. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture 

complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for 

use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 


E. Water: Potable. 

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. 

b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. 

c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. 

d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. 

2.6 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, 

Grade 60 (Grade 420). 

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 

mm) o.c. 

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and 

tee units. 

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type 

with single pair of side rods. 

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS 

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made 

from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

04810-5 




1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, 

Class B-2 coating. 

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least 

halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. 

Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face 

of veneer. 

C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or 

horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane 

of wall. 

1. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a 

metal anchor section. 

a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and 

bottom, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) wide by 3 inches (75 mm) high; with 

projecting tabs having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie 

specially formed to fit anchor section. 

b. Available Products: 

1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213. 

2) Wire-Bond; RJ-711. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS 

A. Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable-iron wedge-type inserts. 

B. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with 

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when 

installed in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed 

when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a 

qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; 

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from 

neoprene. 

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, 

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard 

sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as 

indicated. 

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with 

ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning 

masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are 

04810-6 




formed from 0.142-inch (3.6-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars 

indicated. 


a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or 

D/A 817. 

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. 

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. 

d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. 

2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, 

accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other 

admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended 

mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly 

blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. 

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide 

the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or 

needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 

3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet 

walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and 

for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. 

E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates 

and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 

1. Mix to match Architect's sample. 

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 

1. Use grout of type indicated for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 10 inches as measured according to 

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

04810-7 




1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions 

detrimental to performance of work. 

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to 

verify actual locations of piping connections. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of 

widths indicated. 

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. 

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After 

installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately 

adjacent to opening. 

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a 

continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; 

provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting 

of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges 

concealed. 

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors 

and textures. 

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 

F. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the 

following: 

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, 

and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch 

in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) 

maximum. 

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more 

than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do 

not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 

feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 

or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 

Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 

mm). 

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 

or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint 

thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 

04810-8 




6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment 

by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within 

tolerances specified for warpage of units. 

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a 

straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform 

joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, 

and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, 

where possible, at other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry 

in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal 

face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping 

not less than 4-inches (100-mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at 

corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face 

dimensions at corners or jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from 

those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces 

that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if 

required before laying fresh masonry. 

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other 

Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a 

layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout 

into core. 

G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under 

bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or 

roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of 

structure above. 

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. 

Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down 

into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and 

end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c., unless otherwise 

indicated. 

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of 

tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure 

above approaches final position. 

4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of 

structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 

04810-9 




3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay concrete masonry units as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed 

joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course 

on footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting 

course on footings where cells are not grouted. 

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with 

sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed 

joints or slush head joints. 

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than 

joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes 

(other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 

3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY 

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 

1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. 

2. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches 

(76 mm) into each wythe. Space headers not over 8 inches (203 mm) clear 

horizontally and 16 inches (406 mm) clear vertically. 

B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using 

prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding. 

C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown 

at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T- 

shaped units. 

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover 

of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap 

reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls 

and parapet walls. 

04810-10 




3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall 

openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings. 

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. 

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, 

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 

3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural 

members to comply with the following: 

1. Provide an open space as indicated on the drawings between masonry and 

structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar 

and other rigid materials. 

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints 

and attached to structure. 

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically 

and 16 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 

3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry 

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without 

provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 

1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit 

masonry is complete for application of sealant. 

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a 

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in 

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting 

masonry. 

3.9 LINTELS 

A. Install lintels where indicated. 

B. Provide concrete or masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 24 

inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other 

supporting lintels. 

04810-11 




C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to 

support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed 

masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar 

and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during 

construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have 

hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that 

may be placed on them during construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained 

enough strength to resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for 

grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 


A. Inspectors: Owner may engage qualified independent inspectors to perform 

inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work 

areas, as needed to perform inspections. 

B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting 

agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 

1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 

2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done 

at Contractor's expense. 

3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or 

otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match 

adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent 

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant 

application, where indicated. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to 

remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

04810-12 




D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as 

follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic 

scrape hoes or chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned 

for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before 

proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by 

covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and 

waterproof masking tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly 

by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A 

applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 

6. Clean precast trim to comply with precast supplier's written instructions. 

3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are 

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 


04810-13 



SECTION 05120 

STRUCTURAL STEEL 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes structural steel. 


A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural-steel connections required by the Contract 

Documents to be selected or completed by fabricator to withstand design loadings 

indicated. 

1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified 

professional engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other 

structural data for structural-steel connections. Fabricator shall submit signed 

and sealed shop drawings and calculations. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components, including 

connections, splices, holes, welds, and bolts. 

C. Welding certificates. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality 

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category I, 

conventional steel structures. 

B. Comply with applicable provisions in AISC's " Specification for Structural Steel 

Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" and RCSC's "Specification for 

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural 

Welding Code--Steel." 

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 

A. Store steel members off ground and protect steel members and packaged materials 

from erosion and deterioration. 

05120-1 




B. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become 

dry or rusty before use. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: As Indicated. 

B. Cold-Formed Structural-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. 

C. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 325, headed bolts, Type 1, heavy hex steel 

structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. 

D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel 

structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, 

uncoated. 

E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting 

primer. 

F. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, ASTM C 1107, of consistency 

suitable for application. 

G. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled 

content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content is not less than 60 percent. 

H. Steel shall be regionally (within 500 miles) processed and produced. Contractor shall 

submit certifications verifying compliance. 

2.2 FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate 

structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop 

Drawings. 

1. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for 

Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. 

2. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification 

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

a. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, directtension, 

or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 

3. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and 

quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

05120-2 




B. Shop Priming: Shop prime steel, except surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar, 

surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical 

connections, and surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power 

Tool Cleaning." 

2. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to 

manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide 

a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in 

full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests 

and inspections and to prepare test reports. Comply with Part 3 "Field Quality Control" 

Article. 


3.1 ERECTION 

A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and 

locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. 

B. Erect structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according 

to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. 

C. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bondreducing 

materials and roughen surfaces before setting base and bearing plates. 

Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on wedges, shims, or setting 

nuts as required. 

1. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or bearing 

plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. 

D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard 

Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 

E. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural 

Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

1. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct-tension, 

or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 

F. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of 

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and 

inspections and to prepare test reports. 

05120-3 




1. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that test reports 

and inspections indicate do not comply with specified requirements. 

2. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 

3. High-strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to 

RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 

4. In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be tested and inspected 

according to AWS D1.1 procedures. 


05120-4 



SECTION 05210 

STEEL JOISTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Open-web, K-series AND KCS-series steel joists. 


A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Showing layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. 

Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and 

connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. Special Joists 

shall include signed and sealed shop drawings and calculations. 

C. Welding certificates. 

D. Research/evaluation reports. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those 

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 

1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI 

standard specifications and load tables. 

B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and 

Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), 

applicable to types of joists indicated. 

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural 

Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 


A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." 


2.1 MATERIALS 

05210-1 



STEEL JOISTS 

A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members. 

B. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, 

heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers; plain, uncoated. 

2.2 PRIMERS 

A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's 

standard shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these redoxide 

primers. 

2.3 STEEL JOISTS 

A. Manufacture steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and 

bottom-chord members, and as follows: 

1. Manufacture K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. according to 

"Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series," with steel-angle 

top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 

B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality 

of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES 

A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal 

bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, 

chord size, spacing, and span. 

B. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist 

manufacturer to complete joist installation. 

2.5 SHOP PAINTING 

A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated 

joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, 

SSPC-SP 3. 

B. Apply 1 shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a 

continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. 


3.1 INSTALLATION 

A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. 

05210-2 



STEEL JOISTS 

B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to 

supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written 

recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 

C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and 

procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures 

for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding 

work. 

D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless 

otherwise indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for 

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts " for high-strength structural 

bolt installation and tightening requirements. 

E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads 

are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at 

walls or beams. 


05210-3 



SECTION 05310 

STEEL DECKING 




Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this 

Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Roof Deck 

2. Noncomposite vented roof deck. 


1. Division 03 Section "Lightweight Insulating Concrete" for lightweight insulating 

concrete fill. 

2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear 

connectors. 

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with 

miscellaneous steel shapes. 

4. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. 


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing 

channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to 

other construction. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. 

D. Welding certificates. 

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a 

qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with 

requirements: 

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners. 

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 

05310-1 



STEEL DECKING 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to 

ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural 

Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units 

identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing 

and inspecting agency. 

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing 

and inspecting agency. 

D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck 

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel 

Structural Members." 

E. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval 

Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 

F. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled 

content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, 

storage, and handling. 

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a 

waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 

1. Protect and ventilate roof deck to maintain free of moisture. 



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1. Steel Deck: 

a. ASC Profiles, Inc. 

05310-2 



STEEL DECKING 

b. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. 

c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 

d. DACS, Inc. 

e. D-Mac Industries Inc. 

f. Epic Metals Corporation. 

g. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 

h. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 

i. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. 

j. Roof Deck, Inc. 

k. United Steel Deck, Inc. 

l. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. 

m. Verco Manufacturing Co. 

n. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel 

Corporation. 

2.2 ROOF DECK 

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply 

with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication 

No. 30, and with the following: 

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, 

G60 zinc coating. 

2. Deck Profile: Type B, wide rib. 

3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 

4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 

5. Location: Steep sloped roof. 

2.3 NONCOMPOSITE VENTED ROOF DECK 

A. Noncomposite Vented Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed- and vented-steel sheet 

noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary 

for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 

1. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural 

Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with 

manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 

a. Color: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As noted on plan. 

4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 

5. Side Laps: Overlapped. 

6. Vent Slot Area: Manufacturer's standard vent slots providing 1-1/2 percent open 

area. 

7. Location: Beneath lightweight insulating concrete. 

2.4 ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply 

with requirements indicated. 

05310-3 



STEEL DECKING 

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or 

pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. 

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel 

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. 

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. 

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 

33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and 

finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. 

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of 

same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI 

Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. 

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same 

material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with 

floor deck. 

I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material 

and finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch 

minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field. 

J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and 

finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. 

K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. 

L. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. 



A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and 

commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and 

requirements in this Section. 

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection 

limitations. 

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. 

05310-4 



STEEL DECKING 

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately 

aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not 

stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. 

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of 

abutting panels. 

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or 

deflection. 

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work 

projecting through or adjacent to deck. 

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for 

strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. 

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc 

welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding 

work. 

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate 

mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION 

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the 

surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less 

than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two 

welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. 

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of 

panels between supports, at intervals as indicated, and as follows: 

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel 

screws. 

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 

3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds. 

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 

1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. 

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and 

weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least 

one weld at each corner. 

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld. 

05310-5 



STEEL DECKING 

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end 

closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written 

instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where 

indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to 

ensure complete closure. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to 

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. 

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and 

Architect. 

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. 

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both 

surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and 


B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both 

surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom 

surfaces of deck exposed to view. 

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 


05310-6 



SECTION 05530 

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC MOLDED GRATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Fiberglass Reinforced Molded Gratings. 


A. Delegated Design: Design gratings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by 

a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria 

indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Gratings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Floors: Uniform load of 100 lbf/sq. ft. or concentrated load of 300 LB., whichever 

produces the greater stress. 

2. Deflection shall not exceed 0.375 inches or L/D=120, whichever is less. 

3. Manufacturer shall certify that the stiffness of all panels manufactured are never 

more than 2.5% below the published load-deflection values. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Fiberglass Reinforced Molded Gratings. 

2. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and 

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

D. Color samples. 

05530 - 1 



1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken pallets, packages, 

containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. Adhesives, resins and 

their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to 

facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility. 

B. All materials shall be carefully handled to prevent them from abrasion, cracking, 

twisting, other deformations, and other types of damage. Adhesives, resins and their 

catalyst are to be stored in dry storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit 

until they are required. 


A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer shall offer a three (3) year limited warranty on 

all FRP products against defects in materials and workmanship. 

B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Manufacturer shall be certified to the ISO 9001-2000 

standard. 

C. Manufacturer certifies that the proposed materials used in their products do not contain 

heavy metals in amounts greater than that allowed by current EPA requirements. 

D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is approved by the FRP 

manufacturer. 

E. Grating Certification: All grating products shall be certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61. 

F. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products 

according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with 

appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 


2.1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS MOLDED GRATING 

A. Manufacturer: Grating shall be of one piece molded construction with tops and bottoms 

of bearing bars and cross bars in the same plane. Grating shall have a square mesh 

pattern providing bi-directional strength. Gratings shall be reinforced with continuous 

rovings of equal number of layers in each direction. The top layer of reinforcement shall 

be no more than 1/8 inch below the top surface of the grating so as to provide 

maximum stiffness and prevent resin chipping of unreinforced surfaces. Percentage of 

glass (by weight) shall not exceed 35% so as to achieve maximum corrosion 

resistance, and as required to maintain the specified structural requirements. 

05530 - 2 



B. After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing bars or 

cross bars. All bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation 

irregularities, interlaminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas. 

C. Non-slip Surfacing: Grating shall be manufactured with a concave, meniscus profile on 

top of each bar providing maximum slip resistance. 

D. Grating bar intersections are to be filleted to a minimum radius of 1/16 inch to eliminate 

local stress connections and the possibility of resin cracking at these locations. 

E. Resin System: Manufacturer’s standard. 

F. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be continuous roving in sufficient quantities as need by 

application and/or physical properties required. 

G. Finish: All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, 

free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All galls 

fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against exposure due to wear or 

weathering. 

H. Stainless-Steel Mechanical Grating Clips: Type 316 Stainless Steel. 

2.2 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners. 

Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 

B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors 

capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when 

installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, 

as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 


A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to 

a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp 

or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that 

needed to support indicated loads. 

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 

D. Fabricate toeplates for attaching in the field. 

05530 - 3 



2.4 MOLDED FRP GRATINGS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fibergrate 

1-1/2 inch deep by 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch Square Mesh as manufactured by 

Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. or comparable product: 

B. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations of sizes and at locations 

indicated. Cut openings neatly and accurately to size. Edge-band openings with metal 

sheet or bars having a thickness not less than grating material. 

2.5 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS 

A. Frames and Supports for Gratings: Fabricate from metal shapes, plates, and bars of 

welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to 

receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle frames. Cut, drill, 

and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 

1. Equip units indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry with integrally 

welded anchors. 

B. Galvanize steel frames and supports in the following locations: 

1. Interior, where indicated. 

2.6 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M 

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron 

products. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for 

installing gratings to the greatest extent possible at the manufacturer prior to delivery. 

Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established 

lines and levels and free of rack. 

B. Measurements: Grating supplied shall meet the dimensional requirements and 

tolerances as shown or specified. Field verify existing conditions, including overall 

bearing dimensions, cut-outs, protrusions, penetrations and fabricate grating to fit 

actual field conditions. 

C. Layout: Each grating section shall be readily removable, except where indicated on the 

drawings. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where indicated on the 

drawings. Grating openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, 

etc.) shall be discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section 

of grating is readily removable. 

05530 - 4 



D. Sealing: All shop fabricated grating cuts shall be coated with vinyl ester to provide 

maximum corrosion resistance. All field fabricated grating cuts shall be coated similarly 

by the contractor in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 

E. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel hold-down clips shall be provided and space in 

accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction, but not less than four feet apart 

with a minimum of four per piece of grating. 

F. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints Delete 

subparagraph below if no gratings are installed by welding and no grating frames 

require field welding. 

3.2 INSTALLING FRP GRATINGS 

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing gratings. Use 

manufacturer's standard anchor clips and hold-down devices for bolted connections. 

B. Field cut and drill fiberglass reinforced plastic products with carbide or diamond tipped 

bits and blades. Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s 

instructions. Follow manufacturer’s instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass 

products or using resin products. Provide adequate ventilation. 


05530 - 5 



SECTION 06105 

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Wood blocking and nailers. 

2. Plywood backing panels. 


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading 

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting 

agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an 

agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the 

rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is 

not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be 

treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and 

containing no arsenic or chromium. 

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not 

use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated 

material. 

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the 

ALSC Board of Review. 

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 

1. Wood nailers. 

2. Wood bucks, sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact 

with masonry or concrete. 

3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground 

in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 

4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 

06105-1 




2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or 

attachment of other construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

3. Furring. 

B. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and 

of the following species and grades: 

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 

2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS 

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 

1. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm). 

2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" 

by Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 

B. Substrate-Board Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates 

complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening 

substrate board to substrate. 

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, B-C 

Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) 

nominal thickness. 

2.6 FASTENERS 

A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressurepreservative 

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip 

zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer 

heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material 

being fastened. 



A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with 

requirements for attaching other construction. 

06105-2 




B. Install substrate boards according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. 

C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservativetreated 

lumber. 

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with the Florida Building Code, current edition. 


06105-3 



SECTION 06402 

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 





Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 

2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 

3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 


1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, 

and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other 

construction before woodwork installation. 


A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging 

strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before 

woodwork installation. 


A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic 

laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including 

concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 

2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and 

other items installed in architectural woodwork. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: 

1. Plastic laminates. 

2. PVC edge material. 

3. Thermoset decorative panels. 

4. Solid-surfacing materials. 

06402-1 




D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 


A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated 

for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage 

woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in 

other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions 

comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is 

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining 

temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the 

construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and 

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with 

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork 

by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on 

Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other 

related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural 

woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. 

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in 

Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator 

of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware 

requirements. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for 

each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 

06402-2 




B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 

1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide 

products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content 

plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 10 percent. 

2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder 

containing no urea formaldehyde. 

4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with 

adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not 

indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure 

decorative laminates by one of the following: 

a. Formica Corporation. 

b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. 

c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 

D. Chemical-Resistant, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP, 

and as follows: 

1. Laminate has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according 

to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.9.5: 

a. Nitric Acid (30 Percent): Moderate effect. 

b. Sulfuric Acid (77 Percent): Moderate effect. 

c. Hydrochloric Acid (37 Percent): Moderate effect. 

d. Phosphoric Acid (75 Percent): No effect. 

e. Acetic Acid (98 Percent): No effect. 

f. Formaldehyde: No effect. 

g. Ethyl Acetate: No effect. 

h. Ethyl Ether: No effect. 

i. Phenol (85 Percent): Moderate effect. 

j. Benzene: No effect. 

k. Xylene: No effect. 

l. Butyl Alcohol: No effect. 

m. Furfural: No effect. 

n. Methyl Ethyl Ketone: No effect. 

o. Sodium Hydroxide (25 Percent): No effect. 

p. Sodium Sulfide (15 Percent): No effect. 

q. Ammonium Hydroxide (28 Percent): No effect. 

r. Zinc Chloride: No effect. 

s. Gentian Violet: No effect. 

t. Methyl Red: No effect. 

2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may 

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Formica Corporation; Lab Grade 840 Black. 

b. Panolam Industries International Incorporated; Pionite Chemguard. 

c. Wilsonart International, Div. of Premark International, Inc.; Chemsurf. 

06402-3 




E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying 

with ISSFA-2. 


one of the following: 

a. Avonite, Inc. 

b. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. 

c. Formica Corporation. 

d. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. 

e. Swan Corporation (The). 

f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. 

2. Type: Standard type or Veneer type made from material complying with 

requirements for Standard type, as indicated, unless Special Purpose type is 

indicated. 

3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with 

architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware 

(Scheduled by Describing Products)." 

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees 

of opening. 

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. 

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 

mm) deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. 

E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. 

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip. 

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; fullovertravel-extension 

type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 

mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) 

high or 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

4. Pencil and / or Cash Drawer Slides: Grade 2; for drawers not more than 3 inches 

(75 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, 

molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug 

Mockett & Company, Inc. 

06402-4 




K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with 

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. 

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with 

product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 

B. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that 

comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 

2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior 

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. 

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for 

wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in 

installation areas. 

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum 

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as 

necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide 

ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, 

plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and 

use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped 

openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS 

A. Grade: Custom. 

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate 

complying with the following requirements: 

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 

06402-5 




3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 

4. Edges: PVC T-Mold matching laminate in color, pattern and finish. 

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, 

Grade VGS. 

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in 

color, pattern, and finish. 

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, 

provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 

3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. 

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure 

decorative laminate, Grade BKL. 

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors 

and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations. 

2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following 

categories: 

a. Solid colors, matte finish. 

b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. 

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS 


B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors 

and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following 

categories: 

a. Solid colors, matte finish. 

b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. 

D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 

E. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard. 

F. Core Material at Sinks: exterior-grade plywood. 

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of 

countertop substrate. 

06402-6 



2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 


B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 


C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of 

solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacingmaterial 

manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, 

and finishing. 

1. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application. 



A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in 

installation areas. 

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion 

and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 


A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in 

Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. 

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with 

requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed 

shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 

mm in 2400 mm). 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair 

damaged finish at cuts. 

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. 

Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for 

complete installation. 

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are 

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to 

provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory 

items as indicated. 

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, 

bow, or other variation from a straight line. 

06402-7 




G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or 

other supports into underside of countertop. 

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply 

with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match 

countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean 

entire surface. 

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, 

bow, or other variation from a straight line. 

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 

mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 

Section "Joint Sealants." 

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and 

visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for 

uniform appearance. 

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied 

finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 


06402-8 



SECTION 07170 

BENTONITE PANEL WATERPROOFING 



The general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

The extent of Basis-of-Design Geotextile/Bentonite Clay waterproofing membrane is 

shown on the drawing and/or as specified herein. 

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Division 03 - Concrete 

B. Division 04 - Masonry 


A. Manufacturer: Provide Geotextile/Bentonite Clay waterproofing membrane 

produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years experience in the 

waterproofing industry. 

B. Installer: A firm with a minimum of 2 years experience in installing bentonite clay 

or other related waterproofing products. 


A. Product data sheets, specifications, installation instructions and general 

recommendations for each type of product specified. 

B. Installer: Submit detail drawings for installation of product specified. 

C. Water Sample Test Result: A water sample (2 liters) is required on projects that 

have ground water and should be submitted to the waterproofing manufacturer to 

test for contamination and compatibility with waterproofing membrane. Submit to 

architect a letter of compatibility recommending which formulation to use. 

D. Warranty: Submit specimen of manufacturers’ standard warranty. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Upon completion and acceptance of the work required by this section, the 

manufacturer will issue a warranty agreeing to promptly replace defective 

materials for a period of 5 years. 

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver materials in original manufacturer’s packaging and store materials in strict 

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Remove and replace products that have been prematurely exposed to moisture. 


07170-1 



A. Install materials in accordance with all safety and weather conditions required by 

the manufacturer. 

B. Install materials only after work on the applicable substrate is complete. 

C. Complete cast-in-place reinforced columns prior to membrane installation. 


2.1 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM 

A. The Geotextile/Bentonite clay waterproofing membrane shall be equivalent to 

CCW MiraCLAY supplied by Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Incorporated, 

900 Hensley Lane, Wylie, Texas 75098, Phone (800) 527-7092 Fax: (972) 442- 

0076. 

B. Physical Properties for Geotextile/Bentonite Clay Waterproofing Membrane: 

CCW MiraCLAY Physical Properties: 

Property Test Method Value 

Bentonite Content — 1.0 lb/ft 2 (.488 kg/m 2 )* 

Nominal Dry Thickness — 0.25 in (6.4 mm) 

Weight — 75 lb (34.05 kg) 

Permeability ASTM D 5084 5 x 10 -9 cm/sec 

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 95 lb (422 N) 

Grab Elongation ASTM D 4632 150% 

Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 120 psi (828 kPa) 

Hydrated Internal Shear ASTM D 5321 500 psf (24 kPa) 

Swell Index ASTM D 5890 2g (24 ml) min. 

Fluid Loss ASTM D 5891 18 ml max. 

Dimensions 

5.12 ft x 13.62 ft (69.75 ft²) 

Hydrostatic Head Pressure ASTM D751 228 ft (69.49 meter) 

Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D903 17.7 lb/in (8 kg/cm) 

*@ 12% moisture content 

C. Waterproofing system accessories supplied by waterproofing membrane 

manufacturer: 

Mastic: CCW MiraCLAY Mastic is used for detailing at terminations and 

penetrations. Also used to fill minor voids in concrete and as a fillet in angle 

changes. 

Granules: CCW MiraCLAY Granules used for horizontal to vertical transitions 

and for detailing at seams and slab penetrations. 

Waterstop: CCW MiraSTOP used as a waterstop at cold concrete pours and 

between pre-cast concrete panels. 

D. Membrane to Substrate Fasteners: Fasteners, of the type and length suitable for 

the substrate, shall be used in conjunction with washers, of at least 1” diameter 

to attach the geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane to the substrate. 

E. Membrane to Membrane Fasteners: Mechanically fasten membrane sheets 

together with a box stapler or similar device for horizontal applications. 

F. The Geotextile/Bentonite membrane shall consist of geotextile panels of sodium 

bentonite clay sandwiched between two layers of needle-punched woven and 

non-woven polypropylene fabrics. 

G. Drainage Composite: Shall be CCW MiraDRAIN ® as recommended by the 

manufacturer for each condition. 

H. Perimeter Drainage System: Where required shall be CCW QuickDRAIN. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

07170-2 



A. Examine substrate and condition under which waterproofing will be installed. Do 

not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Lagging, Concrete Cassions, Shotcrete or Gunite Applications: 

1. Fill all spaces that are over 1" (25 mm) in width with grout or concrete to 

a smooth and uniform surface. Cover large gaps with 1/2" (12 mm) 

plywood or CCW MiraDRAIN 6000 or 6000XL. 

2. Trowel CCW MiraCLAY Mastic around all tieback plates and soldier 

beams a minimum of 1 1/2" (39 mm) thick and extend a minimum of 4" 

(10 cm) beyond the flange. 

3. Remove projections from the wall surface in excess of 3/4" (20 mm). 

B. Grade Substrates: Shall be level and uniform that is compacted to a minimum of 

85% modified proctor. 

C. Concrete Application: 

1. Apply CCW MiraCLAY Mastic to all construction joints at a minimum of 

1/4" (7 mm) thickness and a 3" (8 cm) minimum width. 

2. Remove projections from the wall surface in excess of 3/4" (20 mm). 

D. Honeycombing, voids and aggregate pockets exceeding 1” in diameter or have a 

depth greater than 3/4” should be filled with a non-shrink cementitious grout. Fill 

tie-rod holes with a non-shrink cementitious grout. 


A. Prevent geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane from hydrating before 

being covered with overburden. When threat of rain is imminent or backfill is not 

immediate, geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane should be covered 

with polyethylene sheeting. 

B. Lagging Application 

1. Install a stripping piece of CCW MiraCLAY over each soldier beam that 

extends a minimum of 8" (20 cm) beyond either side of the beam. Each 

soldier beam shall have a double layer of CCW MiraCLAY Membrane. 

2. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side out, facing the 

installer. 

3. Starting at the bottom of the wall, unroll CCW MiraCLAY and nail across 

top of panel one nail per 12” (31cm) on center. Allow sheet to hang 

down, nailing only as required to stabilize. 

4. Install adjacent membrane by overlapping edges a minimum of 4” (10 

cm). 

5. Fasten membrane once every 18” (45 cm) on seams or as required to 

prevent blousing. 

6. Extend waterproofing membrane to or above grade and fasten 

membrane once every 12" (30 cm). 

7. Install CCW MiraSTOP at all pour joints and exterior perimeter of tieback 

box outs. 

C. Underslab Application: (Concrete slab shall have a minimum thickness of 4" if 

reinforced or 5” if not reinforced). 

1. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side up, facing the 

installer. 

2. Overlap edges a minimum of 4” (10 cm). 

3. Protect CCW MiraCLAY from damage caused by chairs with sharp 

edges or points by placing a patch of CCW MiraCLAY under the chair. 

4. Staple joints often enough to prevent excessive movement. 

07170-3 



5. Pour CCW MiraCLAY Granules or trowel CCW MiraCLAY Mastic around 

all penetrations and press in “cut-to-fit” collars of CCW MiraCLAY. 

6. Extend the installation of CCW MiraCLAY 12" (31 cm) up or beyond the 

perimeter slab forms. 

7. Inspect and repair any damaged material before concrete pour. 

D. Concrete Wall Application: 

1. Install CCW MiraCLAY with the white non-woven side out, facing the 

installer. 

2. Starting at the bottom of the wall, unroll CCW MiraCLAY and nail across 

top of panel one nail per 12" (31 cm) on center. Allow sheet to hang 

down nailing only as required to stabilize. 

3. Install adjacent membrane by overlapping edges a minimum of 4” 

(10cm). 

4. Fasten membrane once every 18” (45 cm) on seams or as required to 

prevent blousing with 3/4” (20 mm) to 1” (25mm) concrete nails with 

washers. 

5. Extend waterproofing membrane to 6” below grade and fasten 

membrane to the substrate to maintain constant compression using a 

1/8” X 1” (3 X 25 mm) minimum termination bar. Trowel a 1/2” (12 mm) 

thick and 2” (5cm) wide bead of CCW MiraCLAY Mastic at top edge of 

membrane and cover termination bar. 

6. Create a cant at any vertical to horizontal transition by applying a 1.5” to 

2” (4 cm to 5 cm) cant of CCW MiraCLAY Granules or CCW MiraCLAY 

Mastic. 

7. Strip in all outside corners and transitions with a min. 12" (30) piece of 

CCW MiraCLAY membrane to double cover these areas. 

8. Make a min. 1” cant at all inside corners with CCW MiraCLAY Mastic. 

9. Backfill must be compactible soils free of construction debris and must 

be uniformly compacted to a minimum 85% Modified Protor density on 

each lift. 

3.4 PROTECTION AND DRAINAGE 

1. Protect the geotextile/bentonite clay waterproofing membrane with CCW 

MiraDRAIN Drainage Composite. 

2. Install the CCW MiraDRAIN Drainage Composite according to the detailed 

drawings for the specific installation requirements of the project. 

3.6 BACKFILL 

Backfill with smooth and uniform material with no sharp projections or stones 

larger than 3/4”. Compact backfill to an 85% Modified Proctor density. Ensure 

backfill material is not contaminated with salt or other materials that could 

prevent the CCW MiraCLAY from hydrating. 


07170-4 



SECTION 07210 

THERMAL INSULATION 





Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concealed building insulation. 

2. Foamed-in-place masonry wall insulation. 

3. Sound attenuation insulation. 


1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part 

of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system. 

2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies 

of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a 

qualified testing agency for insulation products. 

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a 

single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the 

fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products 

per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 

07210-1 




C. Foamed-in-place Masonry Wall Insulation: 

1. Engage an experienced installer who has been trained and licensed by the 

manufacturer and which has not less than ten years direct experience with the 

installation of the product used. 

2. Provide insulation produced by a single and approved manufacturer. The product 

must come from the manufacturer pre-mixed to ensure consistency. 

3. Insulation subcontractor shall carry Products and Completed Operations 

Insurance with minimum liability limits of $7,000,000. 

D. Recycled Content: Provide glass-fiber insulation with recycled content so 

postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not 

less than 20 percent. 


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, 

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during 

installation. 

B. Protect insulation as follows: 

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation 

and concealment. 

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver insulating materials to Project 

site before installation time. 

3. Complete installation and concealment of insulation materials as rapidly as 

possible in each area of construction. 


2.1 FOAMED-IN PLACE MASONRY INSULATION 

A. Foamed-in-place masonry insulation: Two component thermal insulation produced by 

combining a plastic resin and catalyst foaming agent surfactant which, when properly 

ratioed and mixed, together with compressed air produce a cold-setting foam insulation 

in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 

a. Core-Fill 500 manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products or equivalent 

product. 

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Available Manufacturers: 

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Owens Corning. 

07210-2 




B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without 

membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped 

indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion 

characteristics. 

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide 

blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 

1. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu 

at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for 

other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections 

capable of interfering with insulation attachment. 


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 

application indicated. 

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left 

exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. 

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and 

fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that 

interfere with placement. 

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, 

coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and 

insulation encapsulates piping. 

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected 

from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of 

insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise 

shown or required to make up total thickness. 

07210-3 



3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOAMED-IN-PLACE MASONRY INSULATION 


A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

B. Install foamed-in-place masonry insulation from the interior, prior to installation of 

interior finish work and after all masonry and structural concrete work is in place. 

C. Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry walls where shown on the 

drawings. The foam insulation shall be pressure injected through a series of 5/8 inch 

diameter to 7/8 inch diameter holes drilled into every vertical column of block cells 

(every 8 inches on center) beginning at an approximate height of four feet above 

finished floor level. Repeat this procedure at an approximate height of ten feet above 

the first horizontal row of holes (or as required) until the void is completely filled. Patch 

holes with the same mortar used originally between the unit masonry and score the 

joint to match the existing adjacent joint profile. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF GLASS FIBER AND SOUND ATTENUATION BUILDING 

INSULATION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's 


B. Install glass-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the 

following requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing 

members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that 

will produce a snug fit between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit 

between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting 

fixtures. 

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 

mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by 

taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 

C. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where 

shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a 

density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 

3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION 

A. Install 3-inch- (76-mm-) thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation over suspended 

ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches (1219 mm) on either 

side of partition. 

3.7 PROTECTION 

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical 

abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation 

07210-4 




is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction 

immediately after installation. 


07210-5 



SECTION 07220 

LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE ROOF INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Lightweight Insulating Concrete Application to Prepared Substrate 

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA 

B. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook, IL 


A. Lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation components are defined by Underwriters 

Laboratories under sections CCVW for foamed plastic and CJZZ for floor or roof 

topping mixture in the latest edition of Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance 

Directory. 


A. Shop Drawings: Including roof plan, roof slopes, and thickness of insulation. 

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including manufacturer’s instructions 

for the proper placement of the proposed lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation 

system. 

C. Product test reports. 

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by insulation system manufacturer certifying that Installer 

is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install the insulation system. 

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 

G. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's pull tests inspection report 

of completed insulation system installation. 

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by insulation manufacturer certifying that insulation 

system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. 

07220-1 




2. Submit a letter from the supplier of the proposed lightweight insulating concrete 

system confirming that the expanded polystyrene used as a component in the 

lightweight insulating concrete system is to be furnished by the supplier of the 

proposed lightweight insulating concrete system 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to 

receive manufacturer's warranty. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years 

experience in successfully installing the same roofing materials. 

B. Testing Agency Compliance: Provide a lightweight insulating concrete system meeting 

the following fire resistance standards: 

1. Testing by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with the procedures of 

ASTM E 119 and listed in the most recent Underwriters Laboratories Fire 

Resistance Directory. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in the supplier’s original unopened packages 

with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and 

type, date of manufacture, Underwriters Laboratories label and directions for storage. 

B. Storage: Store bagged concrete aggregate products in a dry location until ready for 

application. Expanded polystyrene board should not be stored in areas of standing 

water prior to application. 

C. Handling: Handle all materials in such a manner as to preclude damage and 

contamination with moisture or foreign matter. 

D. Damaged Material: Any materials that are found to be damaged or stored in any 

manner other than stated above will be automatically rejected, removed and replaced 

at the Contractor’s expense. 

1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Requirements Prior to Job Start 

1. Notification: Give a minimum of 5 days notice to the Owner and manufacturer 

prior to commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily basis of any 

change in work schedule. 

2. Permits: Obtain all permits required by local agencies and pay all fees which 

may be required for the performance of the work. 

3. Safety: Familiarize every member of the application crew with all fire and safety 

regulations recommended by OSHA, NRCA and other industry or local 

government groups. 

B. Environmental Requirements 

07220-2 




1. Weather Limitations: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the 

event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate 

precautions to ensure that materials, applied roofing, and building interiors are 

protected from possible moisture damage or contamination. Proceed with 

installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing 

system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and 

warranty requirements. 

2. Temperature Restrictions: When air temperatures of 40 degrees F or above are 

predicted to occur within the first 24 hours of placement, normal mixing and 

application procedures may be used. When air temperatures of 32 to 40 degrees 

F or above are predicted to occur within the first 24 hours of placement, warm 

water may be used. The mix temperature should not exceed 100 degrees F at 

the point of placement. Do not install the lightweight insulating concrete system 

when air temperatures are below 32 degrees F. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Roof System Guarantee: Upon successful completion of the project, and after all post 

installation procedures have been completed, furnish the Owner with the insulation 

system manufacturer’s 10 year labor and materials warranty. The insulation system 

warranty shall include the composite roof deck system consisting of aggregate fill and 

polystyrene insulation panels. All repair or replacement costs covered under the 

guarantee shall be borne by the insulation system manufacturer. The guarantee shall 

be term type, without deductables or limitations on coverage amount, and be issued at 

no additional cost to the Owner. Specific items covered under the term of the 

insulation system warranty include: 

1. The actual resistance to heat flow through the roof insulation will be at least 80% 

of the design thermal resistance, provided that the roofing membrane is free of 

leaks; 

2. The roof insulation material will not cause structural damage to the building as a 

result of expansion from thermal or chemical action. 

3. The roof insulation will remain in a reroofable condition should the roof 

membrane require replacement (excluding damage caused by fastener pullout 

during removal of the old membrane.) 

4. The roof insulation material will not cause structural damage to the building as a 

result of expansion from thermal or chemical action. 

5. The Insulating Concrete Warranty will not limit, by geographic location, the 

Owner’s rights for claims, actions, and/or proceedings. 

a. Siplast Ten Year Roof Insulation Performance Warranty or approved 

equivalent system. 

07220-3 






A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide a lightweight insulating concrete roof insulation 

system incorporating vermiculite aggregate, pregenerated foam and expanded 

polystyrene board supplied by a single manufacturer: 

1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: ZIC Roof Insulation System by Siplast, Inc. Irving, 

TX or approved equivalent. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Lightweight Concrete System Description: Provide materials used in the light weight 

concrete roof insulation system conforming to the following: 

1. Galvanized Metal Decking: Corrugated steel decking incorporating a pre-applied 

galvanized coating conforming to a minimum Class G-60 as specified in ASTM A 

525 and having slots in the flutes equal to a minimum of 0.75% of the deck area. 

Refer to general notes on the structural drawings and Specification Section 

53100 Steel Decking for metal deck specifications and attachment requirements. 

2. Portland Cement: Portland cement conforming to Type I, II, or III as defined by 

ASTM C150. 

3. Vermiculite Aggregate: Vermiculite concrete aggregate conforming to ASTM 

C332. Equivalent to ZIC Concrete Aggregate by Siplast, Inc., Irving, TX. 

4. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation 

board having a nominal density of 1 Pound per cubic foot (pcf) defined as Type I 

by ASTM C578 and containing approximately 3% of open area. Each bundle of 

board shall be delivered to the job site with clear identification as to manufacturer 

and the Underwriter’s Laboratories Classified label on each bundle. Equivalent to 

Insulperm Insulation Board by Siplast, Inc., Irving, TX. 

5. Water: Potable water that is clean and free of deleterious amounts of acid, alkali 

and organic materials. 

2.3 MIX DESIGN 

A. Density: Mix Portland cement and vermiculite concrete in 1:6 volume ratio with water to 

achieve a wet density ranging from 44 to 60 pounds per cubic foot (pcf), resulting in a 

minimum dry density of 22 pounds per cubic foot (pcf), and minimum compressive 

strength of 140 pounds per square inch (psi). 



A. General: Ensure that all surfaces to receive lightweight insulating concrete are free of oil 

grease, paints / primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances. Where 

07220-4 




necessary, cleaning or other corrections of the surfaces to receive lightweight 

insulating concrete is the responsibility of the party causing the unacceptable condition 

of the substrate. 

B. Substrate Acceptance: With the general contractor present, examine surfaces to receive 

the roof insulation system and determined that the surfaces are acceptable prior to 

placement of the lightweight insulation concrete system. 


A. General: Remove water or any other substance that would interfere with bonding of 

lightweight concrete system. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. General: Provide equipment and application procedures conforming to the material 

supplier’s application instructions. 

B. Applications Incorporating Insulperm Insulation Board: When the specified Insulperm 

Insulation Board is to be incorporated into the lightweight insulating concrete system, 

fill the flutes and place a 1/8 inch minimum thickness of insulating concrete slurry coat 

over the top of the corrugations on metal deck before imbedding the Insulperm 

Insulation Board. Place the thickness of Insulaperm Insulation Board as shown in the 

approved shop drawings and in a brick-like pattern within 30 minutes of applying the 

insulating concrete slurry coat to the substrate. The maximum allowable Insulperm 

Insulation Board step in a stair-step design in one inch. Fill the holes in the Insulperm 

Insulation board and place a 2 inch minimum thickness of insulating concrete over the 

top of the Insulperm Insulation Board within four hours after application of the 

Insulperm Insulation Board. 

C. Thermal Value: Install the ZIC System to provide for an average thermal value of R-20 

or as shown on the architectural details / drawings. 

D. Roof Slope: Install the ZIC System to provide for a minimum positive roof slope of ¼ 

inch per foot. 


A. Protection: Avoid roof-top traffic over the roof insulation system until one can walk over 

the surface without creating surface damage. 

B. Compressive Strength Testing: The Architect has the option to select an independent 

testing laboratory to randomly sample the top placement of insulating concrete to verify 

the thickness and density, and to secure and test compressive strength cylinders in 

accordance with ASTM C 495. The Owner will be responsible for the cost and 

engagement of the independent testing laboratory services. 

C. Application Monitoring: Monitor the thickness and wet density of the lightweight 

insulating concrete at the time of placement to determine conformance to the 

manufacturer’s requirements. Monitor the placement of proper thickness of polystyrene 

insulation board in accordance with the contract documents. 

07220-5 




D. Fastener Withdrawal Testing: Conduct a base ply fastener pull test 3 or more days 

following the application of the lightweight insulating concrete to ensure a minimum 

withdrawal resistance of 40 pounds per fastener. 

3.5 PATCHING 

A. Patching: Perform all patching and repairing of insulating concrete using Zono-Patch or 

other materials approved by the lightweight insulating concrete supplier. 


07220-6 



SECTION 07411 

METAL ROOF PANELS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Standing-seam metal roofing. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layout of sheet metal roofing, including plans, 

elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shopand 

field-assembled work. 

1. Include details for forming, joining, and securing sheet metal roofing, including 

pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, roof 

penetrations, edge conditions, special conditions, connections to adjoining work, 

and details of accessory items. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale with coordinated details for 

penetrations and roof-mounted items. 

B. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for equipment 

manufacturer's portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing panels that 

comply with UL requirements. 

C. Product test reports. 

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Maintenance data. 


A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator authorized by 

portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal 

roofing units required for this Project, and who maintains current UL certification of its 

portable roll-forming equipment. 

07411-1 




B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming 

equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies that 

comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance. Maintain UL certification of 

portable roll-forming equipment for duration of sheet metal roofing work. 

C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal 

Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Warranty form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace 

components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within Two 

years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of 

deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 


2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by 

applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. 

B. Basis-of-Design: Peterson Aluminum corporation – Tite-Loc HS 

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer 

for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance 

required. 

1. Thickness: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Vertical Seam Spacing: 16 inches. 

3. Surface: Smooth, flat. 

4. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat 

with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum 

dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm). 

5. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not 

less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 

6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range including metallic 

color options. 

07411-2 




2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS 

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) 

thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of 

butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. 

Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 

deg F (29 deg C). 

B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m minimum), rosin sized. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective 

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a 

complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet metal or portable rollforming 

equipment manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Fasteners: 

1. General: 

a. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, 

gasketed, with hex-washer head. 

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable 

for metal being fastened. 

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound 

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, 

nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by 

portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of 

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofing 

and remain watertight. 

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited 

movement. 

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal 

roofing assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, 

sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match 

material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 

07411-3 




1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment 

manufacturer to produce sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 

for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

2. Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following 

materials: 

a. Aluminum Roofing: 0.025-inch- (0.64-mm-) thick stainless steel. 

3. Clips: Minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel panel clips 

designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 

4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin 

foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, 

flexible-closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. 

Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight 

construction. 

5. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and finish as sheet metal 

roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing. 


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and 

recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the 

design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and 

other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and 

accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible. 

1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam panels with finished seam height 

of 2 inches. 

B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels with UL-certified, portable 

roll-forming equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing 

assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in 

"Quality Assurance" Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipment 

manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. 

C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, 

buckling, and tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges 

folded back to form hems. 

1. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge 

treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, 

patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for 

leakproof construction. 

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against 

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying selfadhering 

sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent 

separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of 

the metals in contact. 

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with 

recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to 

design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field 

measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

07411-4 





3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 

A. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or 

blocking and that tops of fasteners are flush with surface. 

1. Space fasteners as required by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for 

specified UL classification for wind-uplift resistance. 

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle 

free, on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Comply with temperature 

restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails 

for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply over entire roof, in shingle 

fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 

inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 

mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 

B. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing. 


A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in 

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, 

welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items 

as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet 

metal roofing. 

1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 

2. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, eaves and each side of 

ridge and hip caps. 

3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and 

perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill 

panels for fasteners. 

5. Install ridge and hip caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. 

6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger 

roofing splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 

7. Install sealant tape where indicated. 

8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off 

the material. 

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location 

for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and 

contraction. 

1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at location 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit 

thermal movement. 

07411-5 




C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than 

recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. 

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive 

substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous 

coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by 

other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 

1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal roofing 

with bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, or 

cementitious construction. 

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and 

locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as 

required for a tight installation. 

3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. 

Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool 

marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with 

minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem 

on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two 

fasteners to prevent rotation. 

2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over fastener 

head. 

3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 

m) in length. 

B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 

slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. Prepare joints and apply sealants to 

comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 

C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin 

edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce 

pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 

D. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for 

strength. 

E. Standing-Seam Roofing: Attach standing-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, 

double fastened at spacing as recommended by manufacturer for wind resistance 

indicated. Install panels reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent panels. 

Before panels are interlocked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of 

lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are 

completely engaged. 

1. Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges at roof edge at 

gutters. 

2. Fold over seams after locking at ridges and hips. 

07411-6 




3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight 

mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and 

other components. 

1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly 

including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal 

closures, closure strips, and similar items. 

2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in 

Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's 

requirements. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written 

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide 

concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. 

Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and 

weather resistant. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and 

weathering. 

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. 

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is 

installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 


07411-7 



SECTION 07552 

SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing. 


1. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration 

flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 


A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA 

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this 

Section. 

B. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the 

temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofing asphalt and 

75 centipoise for mechanical spreader-applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or 

minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader 

immediately before application. 


A. ASSEMBLIES - Basis of Design: Siplast; Irving, TX 

1. Project type: New Construction. 

2. Specification Number: 2030 CBA 

3. Deck: Metal 

4. Slope: 1/4 inch min. 

5. Substrate: ZIC Lightweight Insulating Concrete System. See Specification 

Section 07220 

6. Base Sheet: Parabase FS, mechanically attached 

7. Roof System: Paradiene 20, applied in PA-311 M adhesive; Paradiene 30 CR 

FR, applied in PA-311 M adhesive. 

8. Flashing System: Veral Aluminum, torch applied. 

07552-1 





A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain 

watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, 

thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. 

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another 

under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

C. Underwriters Laboratories: Provide an Underwriters Laboratories Class A accepted 

roofing system (including mopping asphalt or cold adhesive) without additional 

requirements for gravel or coatings. 

D. Local Regulations: Conform to regulations of public agencies, including the Florida 

Building Code and any specific requirements of the city and/or state of jurisdiction. 

E. Manufacturer Requirements: Ensure that the primary roofing materials manufacturer 

provides direct trained company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform 

periodic inspections as necessary, and conducts a final inspection upon successful 

completion of the project. 



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other Work. 

1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 

3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 

C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is 

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. 

D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing 



E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by 

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing 

system. 

G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system. 

H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 

07552-2 




J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of 

completed roofing installation. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to 


experience in successfully installing the same roofing materials. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for roofing 

system identical to that used for this Project. Primary roofing products, including each 

type of sheet, all manufactured in the United States, shall be supplied by a single 

manufacturer which has been successfully producing the specified types of primary 

products for not less than 10 years. The primary roofing products shall have 

maintained a consistent composition for a minimum of five years. 

C. Scope of Work: The work to be performed under this specification shall include but is 

not limited to the following: Attend necessary job meetings and furnish competent and 

full time supervision, experienced roof mechanics, all materials, tools, and equipment 

necessary to complete, in an acceptable manner, the roof installation in accordance 

with this specification. Comply with the latest written application instructions of the 

manufacturer of the primary roofing products. In addition, application practice shall 

comply with requirements and recommendations contained in the latest edition of the 

Handbook of Accepted Roofing Knowledge (HARK) as published by the National 

Roofing Contractor’s Association, amended to include the acceptance of a phased roof 

system installation. 

D. Local Regulations: Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific 

requirements of the city and/or state of jurisdiction. 

E. Manufacturer’s Requirements: Ensure that the primary roofing materials manufacturer 




F. Product Quality Assurance Program: Primary roofing materials shall be manufactured 

under a quality management system that is monitored regularly by a third party auditor 

under the ISO 9001:2000 audit process. A certificate of analysis for reporting / 

confirming the tested values of the actual material being supplied for the project will be 

required prior to project close-out. 

G. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system approved by roofing system 

manufacturer. 

H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-testresponse 

characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test 

method below by UL another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable 

testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies 

of which roofing system is a part. 

07552-3 




2. Underwriters Laboratories Class A acceptance of the proposed roofing system 

(including mopping asphalt or cold adhesive) without additional requirements for 

gravel or coatings. 

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with 

requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review 

methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting 

agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's 

representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects 

roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including 


3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, 

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and 

avoid delays. 

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with 

requirements, including flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, 

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing 

system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if 

applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after 

installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and 

labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, 

and directions for storage. 

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected 

location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. 

Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. 

Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and 

protecting during installation. 

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its 

stated shelf life. 

C. Storage: Store materials out of direct exposure to the elements. Store roll goods on a 

clean, flat and dry surface. All material stored on the roof overnight shall be stored on 

pallets. Rolls of roofing must be stored on ends. Store materials on the roof in a 

manner so as to preclude overloading of deck and building structure. Protect materials 

such as solvents, adhesives and asphalt cutback products away from open flames, 

sparks or excessive heat. Cover all material using a breathable cover. Polyethylene or 

other non-breathable plastic coverings are not acceptable. 

07552-4 




D. Handling: Handle all materials in such a manner as to preclude damage and 

contamination with moisture or foreign matter. Handle rolled goods to prevent damage 

to edges or ends. 

E. Damaged Material: Any materials that are found to be damaged or stored in any 

manner other than stated above will be automatically rejected, removed and replaced 

at the Contractor’s expense. 


A. Requirements Prior to Job Start 

1. Notification: Give a minimum of 5 days notice to the Owner and manufacturer 

prior to commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily basis of any 

change in work schedule. 

2. Permits: Obtain all permits required by local agencies and pay all fees which 

may be required for the performance of the work. 

3. Safety: Familiarize every member of the application crew with all fire and safety 

regulations recommended by OSHA, NRCA and other industry or local 

government groups. 

B. Environmental Requirements 

1. Weather Limitations: Do not apply roofing materials during precipitation or in the 

event there is a probability of precipitation during application. Take adequate 

precautions to ensure that materials, applied roofing, and building interiors are 

protected from possible moisture damage or contamination. Proceed with 

installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing 

system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and 


2. Cold Adhesives Temperature Restrictions: Apply cold adhesive at temperatures 

acceptable to the roofing manufacturer. If temperatures are below the 

manufacturer’s optimal application temperature, prepare adhesive in accordance 

with manufacturer’s written instructions as necessary for application. 

C. Protection Requirements 

1. Membrane Protection: Provide protection against staining and mechanical 

damage for newly applied roofing and adjacent surfaces throughout this project. 

2. Torch Safety: Crew members handling torches shall be trained by an Authorized 

Certified Roofing Torch Applicator (CERTA) Trainer, be certified according to 

CERTA torch safety guidelines as published by the National Roofing Contractor’s 

Association (NCRA), and comply with torch safety practices as required by the 

contractor’s insurance carrier. Designate one person on each crew to perform a 

daily fire watch. The designated crew member shall watch for fires or smoldering 

materials on all areas of roof construction activity, and for the minimum period 

required by CERTA guidelines after roofing material application has been 

suspended for the day. 

3. Limited Access: Prevent access by the public to materials, tools and equipment 

during the course of the project. 

4. Debris Removal: Remove all debris daily from the project site and take to a legal 

dumping area authorized to receive such materials. 

07552-5 




5. Site Condition: Complete, to the owner’s satisfaction, all job site clean-up 

including building interior, exterior and landscaping where affected by the 

construction. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Roof System Guarantee: Upon successful completion of the project, and after all post 

installation procedures have been completed, furnish the Owner with the roof system 

manufacturer’s 20 year labor and materials roof system guarantee. The roof system 

guarantee shall include the roofing and flashing membranes, base sheet, and base 

sheet fasteners. All repair or replacement cost covered under the guarantee shall be 

borne by the roof membrane / flashing manufacturer. The guarantee shall be a term 

type, without deductibles or limitations on coverage amount, and be issued at no cost 

to the Owner. Specific items covered under the roof system guarantee include: 

1. The roof system guarantee will not limit, by geographic location, the Owner’s 

right for claims, actions, and/or proceedings. 

2. The warranty shall be equivalent to: Siplast 20 Year Roof System Guarantee. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The specified roofing system is based on the Siplast, Inc. 

Subject to compliance with the requirements; provide either the named product or a 

comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 

1. SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: 

a. Siplast, Inc. 

b. Soprema 

c. Johns-Manville 

2.2 ROOFING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY/PRODUCTS 

A. Base Sheet For ZIC Lightweight Insulating Concrete System Substrates 

1. Base Sheet: A fiberglass reinforced, asphalt coated sheet with a polyolefin film 

backing, having a minimum weight of 20 lb/sq. The sheet shall conform to ASTM 

D4601, Type II requirements. Acceptable types are as follows: 

a. Siplast Parabase FS. 

2. Gypsum Sheathing Panel for Wood / Plywood Substrates to Receive Flashing 

Coverage: 

a. Basis-of-Design – DensDeck Prime Gypsum Roof Board. Refer to 

specification section 61600 Sheathing. 

B. ZIC Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof System: See specification Section 07220. 

07552-6 




2.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 

A. Roofing Membrane Assembly: A roof membrane assembly consisting of two piles of a 

prefabricated, reinforced, homogeneous Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block 

copolymer modified asphalt membrane applied over a prepared substrate. Both 

reinforcement mats shall be impregnated / saturated and coated each side with an 

SBS modified bitumen blend. The roof system shall pass 500 cycles of ASTM D 5849 

Resistance to Cyclic Joint Displacement (fatigue) at 14ºF (-10ºC). Passing results 

show no signs of membrane cracking or interply delamination after 500 cycles. The 

roof system shall pass 200 cycles of ASTM D 5849 after heat conditioning performed in 

accordance with ASTM D 5147. The assembly shall possess waterproofing capability, 

such that a phased roof application, with only the modified bitumen base ply in place, 

can be achieved for prolonged periods of time without detriment to the watertight 

integrity of the entire roof system. 

1. Siplast Paradiene 20 / 30 CR FR roof system 

2. Modified Bitumen Base, Stripping and Flashing Reinforcing Ply 

a. Thickness (avg): 91 mils (2.3 mm) (ASTM D 5147) 

b. Thickness (min): 87 mils (2.2 mm) (ASTM D 5147) 

c. Weight (min per 100 ft² of coverage): 62 lb (3.0 kg/m²) 

d. Maximum filler content in elastomeric blend: 35% by weight 

e. Low temperature flexibility @ -13ºF (-25ºC) – PASS (ASTM D 5147) 

f. Maximum Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 30 lbf/inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

g. Maximum Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18ºC): 70 lbf/inch (12.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

h. Elongation @ 5% Maximum Load (avg.) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 50% (ASTM D 

5147) 

i. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147) 

j. High Temperature Stability (min): 250ºF (121ºC) (ASTM D 5147) 

k. Approvals: UL Class listed (products shall bear seals of approval) 

l. Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and 

dimensional stability criteria 

1) Siplast Paradiene 20 

3. Modified Bitumen Finish Ply 

a. Thickness (avg): 110 mils (2.8 mm) (ASTM 5147) 

b. Thickness at selvage (coating thickness) (avg): 98 mils (2.5 mm) (ASTM D 

5147) 

c. Thickness at selvage (coating thickness) (min): 94 mils (2.4 mm) (ASTM D 

5147) 

d. Weight (min per 100 ft² of coverage): 75 lb (3.6 kg/m²) 

e. Maximum filler content in elastomeric blend: 35% by weight 

f. Low temperature flexibility @ -13ºF (-25°C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) 

g. Maximum Load (avg) @ 73°F (23ºC): 30 lbf/inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

h. Maximum Load (avg) @ 0°F (-18ºC): 75 lbf/inch (13.2 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

i. Elongation @ 5% Maximum Load (avg.) @ 73ºF (23ºC): 55% (ASTM D 

5147) 

j. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147) 

07552-7 




k. High Temperature Stability (min): 250°F (121°C) (ASTM D 5147) 

l. Solar Reflectance: Greater than or equal to 0.70% (ASTM D 1549) 

m. Thermal Emittance: Greater than or equal to 0.80% (ASTM D 1371) 

n. Approvals: UL Class listed (products shall bear seals of approval) 

o. Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and 


p. Surfacing: White synthetic chips 

1) Siplast Paradiene 30 CR FR 

B. Flashing Membrane Assembly: A flashing membrane assembly consisting of a 

prefabricated, reinforced, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) block copolymer modified 

asphalt membrane with a continuous, channel-embossed metal-foil surfacing. The 

finish ply shall conform to ASTM D 6298 and the following physical and mechanical 

property requirements. 

1. Siplast Veral flashing system, aluminum finish 

2. Cant Backing Sheet for Wood / Plywood Surfaces to Receive Flashing Coverage 




d. Maximum filler content in elastomeric blend: 35% by weight 

e. Low temperature flexibility @ -13°F (-25°C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) 

f. Maximum Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23°C): 30 lbf/inch (5.3 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

g. Maximum Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18°C): 75 lbf/inch (13.2 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

h. Elongation @ 5% Maximum Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23°C): 50% (ASTM D 

5147) 

i. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.1% (ASTM D 5147) 

j. High Temperature Stability (min - sheet): 250ºF (121°C) (ASTM D 5147) 

k. High Temperature Stability (min – adhesive coating): 212ºF (100°C) 

(ASTM D 5147) 

l. Approvals: UL Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) 

m. Reinforcement: fiberglass mat or other meeting the performance and 


n. Back Surfacing: polyolefin film 

1) Siplast Paradiene 20 SA 

3. Metal-Clad Modified Bitumen Flashing Sheet 




d. Coating Thickness – back surface (min): 40 mils (1 mm) (ASTM D 5147) 

e. Maximum filler content in elastomeric blend: 35% by weight 

f. Low temperature flexibility @ 0°F (-18°C): PASS (ASTM D 5147) 

g. Maximum Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23°C): 85 lbf/inch (15 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

h. Maximum Load (avg) @ 0ºF (-18°C): 180 lbf/inch (31.7 kN/m) (ASTM D 

5147) 

i. Elongation @ 5% Maximum Load (avg) @ 73ºF (23°C): 45% (ASTM D 

5147) 

07552-8 




j. Tear-Strength (avg): 120 lbf (0.54 kN) (ASTM D 5147) 

k. Dimensional Stability (max): 0.2% (ASTM D 5147) 

l. High Temperature Stability (min): 225ºF (107°C) (ASTM D 5147) 

m. Cyclic Thermal Shock Stability (maximum): 0.2% (ASTM D 6298) 

n. Approvals: UL Approved (products shall bear seals of approval) 

o. Reinforcement: fiberglass scrim mat or other meeting the performance and 


p. Surfacing: aluminum metal foil 

1) Siplast Veral Aluminum 

4. Catalyzed Acrylic Resin Flashing System: A specialty flashing system consisting 

of a liquid applied, fully reinforced, multi-component acrylic membrane installed 

over a prepared or primed substrate. The flashing system consists of a catalyzed 

acrylic resin primer, basecoat and topcoat, combined with a non-woven polyester 

fleece. The resin and catalyst are pre-mixed immediately prior to installation. The 

use of the specialty flashing system shall be specifically approved in advance by 

the membrane manufacturer for each application. 

1) Parapro 123 Flashing System by Siplast; Irving, TX. 

2.4 ROOFING ACCESSORIES 

A. Roofing Adhesives 

1. Membrane Cold Adhesive: An asphalt, solvent blend conforming to ASTM D 

4479, Type II requirements. 

a. Siplast PA-311 M Adhesive by Siplast; Irving, TX 

B. Bituminous Cutback Materials 

1. Primer: An asphalt, solvent blend conforming to ASTM D 41 requirements. 

a. Siplast PA-1125 Asphalt Primer by Siplast; Irving, TX 

2. Mastics: An asphalt cutback mastic, reinforced with non-asbestos fibers, used as 

a base for setting metal flanges conforming to ASTM D 4586 Type II 

requirements. 

a. Siplast PA-1021 Plastic Cement by Siplast; Irving, TX 

C. Sealant: A moisture-curing, non-slump elastomeric sealant designed for roofing 

applications. The sealant shall be approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for 

use in conjunction with the roof membrane materials. Acceptable types are as follows: 

1. Siplast PS-304 Elastomeric Sealant by Siplast; Irving, TX 

D. Synthetic Chips: Synthetic chips to match the factory applied reflective surfacing of the 

finish ply. 

E. Metallic Powder: A finely graded metal dust as supplied or approved by the membrane 

manufacturer, used for covering of bitumen overruns over the foil surfaced membrane. 

07552-9 




F. Perlite Cant Strips: A cant strip composed of expanded volcanic minerals combined 

with waterproofing binders. The top surface shall be pre-treated with an asphalt based 

coating. The face of the cant shall have a nominal 4 inch dimension. 

G. Fasteners 

1. Base Sheet Fasteners: Base sheet fasteners shall be approved by the 

manufacturer of the primary roofing products. Acceptable base sheet fasteners 

for specific substrate types are listed below. 

a. Lightweight Concrete Substrates: 

1) A single unit, precision formed, electro zinc coated steel fastener 

having a 2.7 inch diameter rib reinforced cap and 1.7 inch long 

rectangular legs, designed to expand when fully driven into the 

lightweight concrete. Fasteners for lightweight concrete shall meet 

FM Standard 4470 requirements for corrosion resistance. 

a) Zonotite Base Sheet Fasteners by Siplast; Irving, TX 

2. Gypsum Sheathing Panel Fasteners for Wood / Plywood Substrates to Receive 

Flashing Coverage: Gypsum sheathing panel fasteners and plates shall be 

approved by the manufacturer of the primary roofing products. The fastening 

pattern for each panel to be used shall be as recommended by the panel 

manufacturer and approved by the manufacturer of the primary roofing products. 

Acceptable panel fastener manufacturers for specific substrate types are listed 

below. 

1) Wood / Plywood Substrates to Receive Flashing Coverage: Gypsum 

sheathing panel mechanical fasteners shall be factory coated for 

corrosion resistance. The fastener shall conform, meet or exceed 

Factory Mutual Standard 4470 and when subjected to 30 Kesternich 

cycles, show less than 15% red rust. Acceptable fastener types for 

wood / plywood substrates are listed below. A fluorocarbon coated 

screw type roofing fastener having a minimum 0.220 inch thread 

diameter. Plates used in conjunction with the fastener shall be a 

metal type having a minimum 3 inch diameter, as supplied by the 

fastener manufacturer. 

a) Parafast Fastener by Siplast; Irving, TX 

b) Roofgrip with Buldex Metal Plates by ITW Buildex; Itasca, IL 

c) Dekfast #12 with Dekfast Steel Hexagonal Plates by 

Construction Fasteners, Inc. Wyomissing, PA 

d) Standard Roofing Fasteners by OMG; Agawam, MA 

3. Flashing Reinforcing Sheet Fasteners for Wood / Plywood Substrates to Receive 

Flashing Coverage: Fasteners shall be approved by the manufacturer of the 

primary roofing products. Acceptable fastener types for specific substrates are 

listed below. 

07552-10 




1) Wood / Plywood Substrates: A 12 gauge, spiral or annular threaded 

shank, zinc coated steel roofing fastener having a minimum 1 inch 

head. Acceptable fastener types for wood / plywood substrates are 

listed below. 

a) Square Cap by W.H. Maze Co.; Peru, IL 

b) 12 Gauge Simplex Nail by the Simplex Nail and Manufacturing 

Co., Americus, GA. 

H. Walktread: A prefabricated, puncture resistant polyester core reinforced, polymer 

modified bitumen sheet material topped with a ceramic-coated granule wearing 

surface. 

1. Thickness: 0.217 in (5.5 mm) 

2. Weight: 1.8 lb/ft² (8.8 kg/m²) 

3. Width: 30 in (76.2 cm) 

a. Paratread Roof Protection Material by Siplast; Irving, TX 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing 

system: 

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and 

that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 

2. Verify that cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck 

at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with 

requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 

4. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no 

adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining 

deck. 


corrected. 


A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing 

installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove 

sharp projections. 

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from 

spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs 

when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 

07552-11 




3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 

A. Preparation of Wood / Plywood Substrates to Receive Flashing Coverage: 

Mechanically attach the gypsum sheathing panels to all wood / plywood substrates that 

will be covered with the specified flashing membrane, using the specified screws / 

plates, at 12 inches o.c. staggered. Cut the cant backing sheet into 12 inch widths and 

peel the release film from the back of the sheet. Set the sheet into place extending 6 

inches onto the field of the roof area and 6 inches up the gypsum sheathing panel 

surface utilizing minimum 3 inch side laps. Set the cant into place prior to installation of 

the roof membrane base ply. 

B. ZIC Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof System: See Specification Section 07220. 

C. Base Sheet Securement to Prepared Substrate: Lay the base sheet over the entire 

area to be roofed, lapping sides 3 inches and ends 6 inches. Using the specified 

fasteners, fasten each sheet every 7 1/2 inches through laps and stagger fasten the 

remainder of the sheet in two rows on nominal 12 inch centers with fasteners in each 

row on 10 inch centers. Increase the fastening pattern by 70% at the perimeter of the 

roof and 160% at the corners. 

3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written 

instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control 

Guidelines for the Application of Modified Bitumen Roofing." 

B. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform 

services for installing roofing system. 

C. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing 

membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left 

uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane 

sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot 

roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to 

prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 

D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, 

entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building 

construction. 

E. Membrane Application: Apply roofing in accordance with roofing system manufacturer’s 

instructions and the following requirements. Application of roofing membrane 

components shall immediately follow application of base sheet and / or insulation as a 

continuous operation. 

F. Aesthetic Considerations: An aesthetically pleasing overall appearance of the finished 

roof application is a standard requirement for this project. Make necessary 

preparations, utilize recommended application techniques, apply the specified 

07552-12 




materials including synthetic chips and metallic powder, and exercise care in ensuring 

that the finished application is acceptable to the Owner. 

G. Priming: Prime metal and concrete and masonry surfaces with a uniform coating of the 

specified asphalt primer. 

H. Bitumen Consistency: Cutting or alterations of bitumen, primer, and sealants will not 

be permitted. 

I. Membrane Adhesive Application: Membrane adhesive can be applied by roller, 

squeegee or spray unit. Apply cold adhesive in a smooth, even continuous layer 

without breaks or voids. Utilize an application rate of 2 to 2 ½ gal/sq over irregular or 

porous substrates. Utilize an application rate of 1 ½ to 2 gal/sq for interplay 

applications. Double the adhesive application rate at the end laps of granule surfaced 

sheets. In the areas surrounding details that are to receive the catalyzed acrylic resin 

primer and flashing system, apply membrane plies in a full coating of the specified 

elastomeric sealant in lieu of the solvent based adhesive a minimum 8 inches from the 

base of the penetration or curb. 

J. Roofing Application: Apply all layers of roofing free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths. 

Exert sufficient pressure on the roll during application to ensure prevention of air 

pockets. 

1. Apply all layers of roofing perpendicular to the slope of the deck. 

2. Fully bond the base ply to the prepared substrate, utilizing minimum 3 inch side 

and end laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the cold adhesive applicator. 

Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps on overlapping selvage edges. Using a 

clean trowel, apply top pressure to top seal T-laps immediately following sheet 

application. Stagger end laps a minimum of 3 feet. 

3. Fully bond the finish ply to the base ply, utilizing minimum 3 inch side and end 

laps. Apply each sheet directly behind the cold adhesive applicator. Stagger 

end laps of the finish ply a minimum 3 feet. Cut a dog ear angle at the end laps 

on overlapping selvage edges. Using a clean trowel, apply top pressure to top 

seal T-laps immediately following sheet application. Stagger side laps of the 

finish ply a minimum 12 inches from side laps in the underlying base ply. 

Stagger end laps of the finish ply a minimum 3 feet from end laps in the 

underlying base ply. 

4. Maximum sheet lengths and special fastening of the specified roof membrane 

system may be required at various slope increments where the roof deck slope 

exceeds ½ inch per foot. The manufacturer shall provide acceptable sheet 

lengths and the required fastening schedule for all roofing sheet applications to 

applicable roof slopes. 

K. Synthetic Chip Embedment: Broadcast synthetic chips over all bitumen / adhesive 

overruns to the finish ply surface. Ensure a monolithic surface color. 

L. Flashing Application – masonry surfaces: Flash masonry parapet walls and curbs 

using the reinforcing sheet and the metal foil flashing membrane. After the base ply 

has been applied to the top of the cant, fully adhere the reinforcing sheet, utilizing 

minimum 3 inch side laps and extend a minimum of 3 inches onto the base ply surface 

and 3 inches up the parapet wall above the cant. After the final roofing ply has been 

applied to the top of the cant, prepare the surface area that is to receive flashing 

coverage by torch heating granular surfaces or by application of asphalt primer; 

allowing primer to dry thoroughly. Torch apply the metal foil-faced flashing into place 

07552-13 




using three foot widths (cut off the end of roll) always lapping the factory selvage edge. 

Stagger the laps of the metal foil flashing layer from lap seams in the reinforcing layer. 

Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of 4 inches beyond the toe of the cant onto the 

prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height. 

Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with 

the wall/roof surfaces, preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a 

damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge 

of the flashing on 9 inch centers. (See manufacturer’s schematic for visual 

interpretation). 

M. Flashing Application – surfaces sheathed with gypsum sheathing panels: After the 

gypsum sheathing panel and cant backing sheet have been installed, flash parapet 

walls and curbs with the specified reinforcing sheet and the metal foil flashing 

membrane. The reinforcing sheet shall have minimum 3 inch side laps and extend a 

minimum of 3 inches onto the base ply surface and to the top of the parapet wall or 

curb. Using the specified fasteners, mechanically attach the reinforcing sheet through 

the field of the sheet to the vertical flashing surface on 12 inch centers from the top of 

the cant to the top of the wall or curb. Fully adhere the remainder of the flashing 

reinforcing sheet that extends over the cant and roof level. Using a Leister Hand 

Welding Tool, seal the laps between flashing reinforcing sheets. After the final roofing 

ply has been applied to the top of the cant, prepare the surface area that is to receive 

flashing coverage by torch heating granular surfaces or by application of asphalt 

primer; allowing primer to dry thoroughly. Torch apply the metal foil-faced flashing into 

place using three foot widths (cut off the end of roll) always lapping the factory selvage 

edge. Stagger the laps of the metal foil flashing layer from lap seams in the reinforcing 

layer. Extend the flashing sheet a minimum of 4 inches beyond the toe of the cant onto 

the prepared surface of the finished roof and up the wall to the desired flashing height. 

Exert pressure on the flashing sheet during application to ensure complete contact with 

the wall/roof surfaces, preventing air pockets; this can be accomplished by using a 

damp sponge or shop rag. Check and seal all loose laps and edges. Nail the top edge 

of the flashing on 9 inch centers. (See manufacturer’s schematic for visual 

interpretation). 

N. Catalyzed Acrylic Resin Flashing System: Install the liquid-applied primer and flashing 

system in accordance with the membrane system manufacturer’s printed guidelines 

and other applicable written recommendations as provided by the manufacturer. 

O. Use of Metallic Powder: Broadcast metallic powder over all bitumen overruns on the 

metal foil membrane surface while the bitumen is still hot to ensure a monolithic 

surface color. 

P. Water Cut-Off: At end of day’s work, or when precipitation is imminent, construct a 

water cut-off at all open edges. Cut-offs can be built using asphalt or plastic cement 

and roofing felts, constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cut-offs must 

be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing. 

3.5 ROOF SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH RELATED COMPONENTS 

A. Edge Metal: Completely prime metal flanges and allow to dry prior to installation. Turn 

the base ply down 2 inches past the roof edge and over the nailer. After the base ply 

and continuous cleat have been installed, set the flange in mastic and stagger nail 

every 3 inches on center. Strip-in the flange using the stripping-ply material, extending 

07552-14 




a minimum of 4 inches beyond the edge of the flange. Terminate the finish ply at the 

gravel-stop rise of the edge metal. SEE ITEM: SEALANT, for finish of this detail. 

B. Lead Pipe Flashings: Completely prime the lead flanges and allow to dry prior to 

installation. After the base ply has been applied, set the flange in mastic and strip-in 

the flange using the stripping-ply material, extending a minimum of 4 inches beyond 

the edge of the flange. Terminate the finish ply at the flange-sleeve juncture of the 

pipe flashing. SEE ITEM: SEALANT for finish of this detail. 

C. Lead Drain Flashings: Completely prime the lead drain flashing and allow to dry prior 

to installation. After the base ply has been applied, set the lead flashing sheet in 

mastic and form to turn down inside of the drain bowl. Ply-in the perimeter of the lead 

flashing using an additional layer of the base ply material, overlapping the perimeter of 

the lead a minimum of 4 inches. Terminate the finish ply to extend beneath the 

clamping ring seal. Install the clamping ring with all bolts in place. 

D. Metal Pipe Flashings: Completely prime the metal pipe flanges and allow to dry prior 

to installation. After the base ply has been applied, set the flanges in mastic and stripin 

the flange using the stripping-ply material, extending a minimum of 4 inches beyond 

the edge of the flange. Terminate the finish ply at the flange-sleeve juncture of the 

pipe flashing. Install a watertight umbrella to the penetration, completely covering the 

opening of the pipe flashing. SEE ITEM: SEALANT for finish of this detail. 

E. Walktread: Cut the walktread into maximum 5 foot lengths and allow to relax until flat. 

Adhere the sheet using the specified plastic cement. Apply the specified cement in a 

3/8 inch thickness to the back of the product in 5 inch by 5 inch spots in accordance 

with the pattern as supplied by the walkthread manufacturer. Walk-in each sheet after 

application to ensure proper adhesion. Use a minimum spacing of 2 inches between 

sheets to allow for proper drainage. 

F. Sealant: Apply a smooth continuous bead of the specified sealant at the exposed 

finish ply edge transition to metal flashings incorporated into the roof system. 

G. Roof Moisture Relief Vents – non-vented lightweight insulating concrete substrates: 

Completely prime the metal flanges and allow to dry prior to installation. After the base 

ply has been applied, mark the venting designations. Cut a 2 diameter core from the 

roof assembly down to the top surface of the embedded Insulperm expanded 

polystyrene panels. Fill the resulting void with fiberglass insulation. Set the vent flange 

in mastic, centered over the core cut. Strip-in the flange using the stripping-ply 

material, extending a minimum of 4 inches beyond the edge of the flange. Terminate 

the finish ply at the flange-throat juncture of the vent. SEE ITEM: SEALANT, for finish 

of this detail. 


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel 

to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. 

B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or 

inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 

07552-15 




C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to 

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 

When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for 

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with 

copies to Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with 

requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition 

free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to 


C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and 

procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Site Condition: Leave all areas around job site free of debris, roofing materials, 

equipment and related items after completion of job. 

B. Notification Of Completion: Notify the manufacturer by means of manufacturer’s printed 

Notification of Completion form of job completion in order to schedule a final inspection 

date. 

C. Final Inspection: 

1. Post-Installation Meeting: Hold a meeting at the completion of the project, 

attended by all parties that were present at the pre-job conference. A punch list 

of items required for completion shall be complied by the Contractor and the 

manufacturer’s representative. Complete, sign and mail the punch list form to the 

manufacturer’s headquarters. 

D. Issuance Of The Guarantee: Complete all post installation procedures and meet the 

manufacturer’s final endorsement for issuance of the specified guarantee. 


07552-16 



SECTION 07620 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 

1. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 

2. Formed wall flashing and trim. 


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and 

blocking. 

2. Division 7 Section "S.B.S. Modified Bitumen Roofing system" for installing sheet 

metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. 

3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim 

sealants. 


A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural 

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, 

rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. 

B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the forces 

detailed in the structural drawings and according to recommendations in FMG Loss 

Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal 

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and 

surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, 

overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other 

detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result 

of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface 

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 

deg C), material surfaces. 

D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water 

infiltration to building interior. 

07620-1 





A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and 

elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the 

following: 

1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in 

Project. 

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, 

seams, and dimensions. 

3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and 

trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 

4. Indicate locations of seams. 

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 

Samples of size indicated below: 

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, 

closures, and other attachments. 

2. Trim: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed 

accessories. 


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated. 


A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet 

metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. 

B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to 

prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. 

C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and 

ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with 

other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 


A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining 

construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 

07620-2 









be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 

2.2 SHEET METALS 

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, 

Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than 

H14, finished as follows: 

a. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to 

exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' 

written instructions. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's 

standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated 

inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 

70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with 

AAMA 2604. 

b. Color: Custom Color to match the roof color. Refer to sheet metal items 

below for locations 

c. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: 

nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; 

Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) 

complying with AAMA 611. 

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS 

A. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils (1.0 mm) thick 

minimum, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface 

laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. 


a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield. 

b. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender. 

c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock. 

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective 

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete 

sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 

B. Fasteners: Screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and 

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 

07620-3 




1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic 

caps or factory-applied coating. 

2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, 

gasketed, with hex washer head. 

3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 

C. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound 

sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, 

nontoxic, nonstaining tape. 

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, 

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and 

trim and remain watertight. 

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, 

recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including 

riveted joints. 

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- 

mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound 

free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 

G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for 

application. 


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with 

recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to 

design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate 

items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop 

fabrication. 

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with 

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and 

metal. 

C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and 

tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to 

form hems. 

1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form 

seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate 

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. 

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the 

Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less 

than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet 

metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. 

07620-4 




G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being 

anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 

1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal 

Manual" and FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application but not less 

than thickness of metal being secured. 

2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet 

tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) 

long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from 

same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the 

gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead 

reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 

1. Accessories: Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and 

hardware cloth screen. 

2. Fabricate from the following material: 

a. Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

b. Finish: Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System. 

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. 

Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 

1. Manufactured Hanger Style: Refer to drawings. 

2. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: 


b. Finish: Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System at upper roof and clear anondized at 

conductor heads. 

C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim 

to exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches 

(100 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following 

materials: 

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. 

2. Finish: Clear Anondized. 

D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top 

edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange 

trim, and built-in overflows. Fabricate from the following materials: 


2. Finish: Clear Anondized. 

E. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: 


2. Finish: Mill Finish. 

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- 

(3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish 

07620-5 




with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for 

fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 

1. Coping Profile: Refer to construction drawings. 

2. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide, concealed backup plate and 6- 

inch- (150-mm-) wide, exposed cover plates. 

3. Fabricate from the following materials: 


b. Finish: Clear Anondized finish. 

B. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 


2. Finish: Mill finish. 

C. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 


2. Finish: Mill finish 

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 

1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft. (1.6 mm thick), hard tempered. 

2.8 FINISHES 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" 

for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by 

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces 

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. 

Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance 

of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples 

and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual 

locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and 

securely anchored. 


corrected. 

07620-6 





A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work 

securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, 

solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other 

miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 

1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive 


coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or 

manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 

1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with 

bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or 

cementitious construction. 

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood 

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or 

install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof 

performance. 

C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, 

and tool marks. 

D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, 

neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. 

E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight 

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before 

fabricating sheet metal. 

1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with 

two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 

F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 

inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion 

provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints 

of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with 

elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 

G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 

inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. 

1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. 

H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not 

less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. 

When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 

07620-7 




70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either 

way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient 

temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F 

(4 deg C). 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 


I. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for 

strength. 

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage 

system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate 

installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. 

B. Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated. Continuously support scupper, set to 

correct elevation, and under roofing membrane. 

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance 

requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where 

possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and 

seams that will be permanently watertight. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to 

recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone 

and as indicated. 

1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to 

substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers. 

C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in 

FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 

1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to 

substrate at 16-inch (400-mm) centers. 

2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 18-inch (450- 

mm) centers. 

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base 

flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. 

Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing 

joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant. 

1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or 

lead wedges and sealant. 

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with 

installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 

07620-8 




1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping 

with flashing. 

2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except 

for lead flashing on vent piping. 

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing 

with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric 

sealant to equipment support member. 


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and 

weathering. 

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing 

and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including 

removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. 

Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have 

deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair 

procedures. 


07620-9 



SECTION 07841 

THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through 

fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings 

containing penetrating items. 


1. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 

2. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both 

empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide throughpenetration 

firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire 

according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and 

maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following 

ratings determined per UL 1479: 

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings 

indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of 

constructions penetrated. 

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration 

firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems 

protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in 

occupiable floor areas: 

a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 

b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in 

smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings 

indicated of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both 

ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C). 

07841-1 




C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and 

physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed 

to these conditions both during and after construction. 

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide 

moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width 

and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of 

supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop 

systems not requiring removal of insulation. 

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flamespread 

and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as 

determined per ASTM E 84. 



B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of 

construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of 

penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting 

agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and 

inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system 

configuration for construction and penetrating items. 

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and 

inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop 

condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by throughpenetration 

firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an 

engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each throughpenetration 

firestop system, along with the following information: 

1. Types of penetrating items. 

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where 

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop 

design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

E. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by 

product manufacturer. 

F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration 

firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current 

products. 

07841-2 





A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop 

systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose 

work has resulted in construction with a record of successful 

performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and 

training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's 

willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to 

Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems 

and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of 

penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that 

comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance 

Requirements" Article: 

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A 

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing 

testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing 

standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide 

rated systems complying with the following requirements: 

a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of 

qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by 

reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the 

following: 

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, 

unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels 

identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if 

applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to 

Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their 

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other 

causes. 

07841-3 





A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when 

ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration 

firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, 

condensation, or other causes. 

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions 

by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that throughpenetration 

firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to 

accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. 

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of throughpenetration 

firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding 

each series of installations. 

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become 

concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by 

building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 



A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration 

firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

those systems indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Specification that 

are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 

3. Hilti, Inc. 

4. Johns Manville. 

5. Nelson Firestop Products. 

6. NUCO Inc. 

7. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 

8. Specified Technologies Inc. 

9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 

10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 

11. USG Corporation. 

07841-4 




2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with 

one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, 

penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer 

based on testing and field experience. 

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that 

are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance 

Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop 

system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for 

firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following 

items: 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing 

materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 

2.3 FILL MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill 

materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of 

Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are 

those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," 

"void," or "cavity" materials. 

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place 

concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent 

strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to 

concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. 

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify 

during exposure to moisture. 

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined 

with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced 

elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. 

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no 

solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 

07841-5 




G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with 

aluminum foil on one side. 

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic 

cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project 

site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. 

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth 

cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and 

fire-retardant additives. 

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, 

expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric 

sealants of grade indicated below: 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other 

horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other 

surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop 

system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings 

in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and 

other surfaces. 

2.4 MIXING 

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with throughpenetration 

firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate 

proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of 

mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to 

produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for 

application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other 

conditions affecting performance of work. 


corrected. 

07841-6 





A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing throughpenetration 

firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written 

instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign 

materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop 

systems. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound 

surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop 

systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration 

firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and 

methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto 

exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems 

from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and 

that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by 

cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove 

tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 

"Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written 

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to 

support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce 

cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components 

of firestop systems. 

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following 

results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings 

and penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

07841-7 




3.4 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. 

Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of 

edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove 

penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For 

plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding 

labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, 

will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following 

information on labels: 

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. 

Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 

6. Installer's name. 


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to 

inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply 

with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting 

inspections, and preparing test reports. 

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems 

so they comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction 

only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with 

requirements. 

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods 

and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop 

system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure 

that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time 

of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, 

cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems 

immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified 

requirements. 


07841-8 



SECTION 07920 

JOINT SEALANTS 




Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant 

Schedule at the end of Part 3. 


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for masonry control and expansion 

joint fillers and gaskets. 

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 

3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of 

gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 

4. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 

5. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at 

perimeters of acoustical ceilings. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed 

for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. 


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted 

by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 

2. When joint substrates are wet. 

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for 

applications indicated. 

4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed 

from joint substrates. 



07920-1 




A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed 

in other the joint sealant schedule. 

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are 

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field 

experience. 

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full 

range. 

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for 

each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing 

ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and 

joint substrates. 

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be 

nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing 

according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for 

Project. 

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are 

compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are 

approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience 

and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a 

surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant 

manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant 

depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials 

or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. 

Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for 

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction 

joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of 

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances 

07920-2 




capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any 

way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

2.6 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are 

compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and 

application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field 

experience. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for 

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of 

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances 

capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any 

way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and 

surfaces adjacent to joints. 



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance 

with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions 

affecting joint-sealant performance. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants 

to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following 

requirements: 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with 

adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective 

coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant 

manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, 

water, surface dirt, and frost. 

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, 

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, 

sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. 

Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming 

07920-3 




or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include 


a. Concrete. 

b. Masonry. 

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not 

stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of 

joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Metal. 

b. Glass. 

c. Porcelain enamel. 

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant 

manufacturer, based on prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant 

manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do 

not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with 

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such 

contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for 

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use 

of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in 

ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to 

materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at 

position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants 

relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant 

application and replace them with dry materials. 

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used 

between sealants and backs of joints. 

F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same 

time backings are installed: 

07920-4 




1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that 

allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning 

or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form 

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to 

ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that 

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 

H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses 

by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint 

sealants and of products in which joints occur. 


A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating 

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes 

so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, 

despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged 

or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are 

indistinguishable from original work. 

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE 

A. Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Exterior horizontal nontraffic and traffic isolation and 

contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product - Vulkem 245, Two-Part Pourable Polyurethane Sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match adjacent surface color.. 

B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit 

masonry. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product – Dymeric 240, Epoxidized Polyurethane Sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match masonry color. 

C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-3: Exterior butt joints between metal panels. 

07920-5 




1. Joint Sealant: Product – Vulkem 116, One-Part High Performance Elastomer 

weatherproofing sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match intersecting metal color. 

D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed 

above. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product - Dymeric 240, Epoxidized Polyurethane Sealant. 


E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-5: Exterior perimeter joints between masonry and frames 

of doors windows and louvers. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product - Vulkem 116, One-Part High Performance Elastomer 

weatherproofing sealant. 


F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-6: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and 

other overhead surfaces. 


2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match ceiling color. 

G. Joint-Sealant Application JS-7: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed 

interior surfaces of exterior walls. 


2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match ceiling color. 

H. Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product – Pecora AC-20 FTR, Fire and Temperature Rated 

Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match metal color. 

I. Joint-Sealant Application JS-9: Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, 

and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product - Vulkem 245, Two-Part Pourable Polyurethane Sealant. 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match grout color. 

J. Joint-Sealant Application JS-10: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining 

walls, floors, and counters. 

1. Joint Sealant: Product – Dow Corning, 786 Silicone Sealant 

2. Joint-Sealant Color: White. 

K. Joint-Sealant Application JS-11: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit 

masonry and concrete walls and partitions. 



2. Joint-Sealant Color: White. 

07920-6 




L. Joint-Sealant Application JS-12: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and 

frames of interior doors, and windows. 



2. Joint-Sealant Color: Match window frame and door frame color. 


07920-7 



SECTION 08111 

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal 

thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. 

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference 

numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and 

labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on 

testing at positive pressure as close to neutral pressure as possible according to 

NFPA 252. 

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, 

provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not 

more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard 

fire-test exposure. 

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 

that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to 

NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. 

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 



08111-1 




1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 

3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed 

applications. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; 

with minimum G90 (Z180) metallic coating. 

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating 

designation; mill phosphatized. 

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according 

to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as 

measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 

G. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing." 

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

1. Design: Flush panel. 

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene, polyurethane, or 

vertical steel-stiffener core. 

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x 

sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. 

4. Vertical edges for Double Acting Doors: Radius. 

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) 

thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 

6. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and 

Frames." 

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with 

ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance 

level: 

08111-2 




1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 

(Seamless). 

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with 

ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance 

level: 

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 

(Seamless). 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

1. Closer reinforcements continuous sleeve: 12 gage. 

2. Hinge reinforcements: 7 gage. 

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick metallic coated 

steel sheet. 

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is 

indicated. 

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Frames for all openings over 36” width: 0.067-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 

5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame. 

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 

1. Closer reinforcements continuous sleeve: 12 gage. 

2. Hinge reinforcements: 7 gage. 

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS 

A. Jamb Anchors: 

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less 

than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 

2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8- 

inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe 

spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at 

each anchor location. 

08111-3 




B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 

mm) thick, and as follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive 

fasteners. 

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, 

allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of 

frames at finish floor surface. 

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS 

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material 

as door face sheet. 

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 

inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same 

material as frames. 

2.7 LOUVERS 

A. Provide sightproof and lightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that 

comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, 

cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame. 

1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, 

and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fireresistance 

rating indicated. 


A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical 

anchors. 

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide 

steel. 

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 

mm) thick. 


A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. 

B. Hollow Metal Doors: 

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal 

joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 

08111-4 




3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where 

required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. 

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment 

plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make 

smooth, flush, and invisible. 

2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no 

visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. 

Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed 

fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to 

be grouted. 

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four 

spot welds per anchor. 

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: 

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from 

top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 

mm) o.c. and as follows: 

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) 

high. 

3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) 

high. 

4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) 

high. 

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from 

top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 

mm) o.c. and as follows: 

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 

3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 

4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 

5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1066 mm) 

wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 

c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches 

(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 

inches (660 mm) o.c. 

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door 

silencers. 

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. 

b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. 

08111-5 




D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated 

mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished 

as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted 

door hardware. 

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and 

ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for 

hardware. 

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with 

Division 26 electrical Sections. 

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. 

Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of 

hollow metal work. 

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that 

each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior 

doors and frames. 

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing 

and type of installation indicated. 

2.10 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and 

pretreating. 

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. 



A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until 

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove 

temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. 

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling 

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint 

continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible 

on exposed faces. 

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of 

opening. 

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. 

08111-6 




e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have 

been properly set and secured. 

f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are 

constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to 

floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of 

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop 

Drawings. 

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 

4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with 

postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make 

smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 

5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to 

overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is 

anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of 

struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide 

adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, 

alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet 

on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a 

horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face 

corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. 

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances 

specified below. Shim as necessary. 

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: 

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch 

(1.6 mm). 

c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 

mm). 

d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): 

Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. 

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and 

with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced 

uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 

mm) o.c. from each corner. 

08111-7 





A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before 

final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and 

replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or 

otherwise unacceptable. 

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged 

areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair 

paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. 


08111-8 



SECTION 08211 

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 

3. Louvers for flush wood doors. 


1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, 

louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind 

of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of 

hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 

1. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small 

sections for the following: 

1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for 

stained finishes. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards 

Illustrated." 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project 

indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 

08211-1 




C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by 

a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire 

ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and 

relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and 

Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective 

in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 

mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core 

construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) 

span. 

1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of 

Substantial Completion: 

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1. Flush Wood Doors: 

a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 

b. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 

c. Graham Door Company 

d. Marshfield Door Company. 

2. Metal Louvers for Doors: 

a. Air Louvers, Inc. 

b. Anemostat Door Products. 

c. Hiawatha, Inc. 

08211-2 




d. Leslie-Locke, Inc. 

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL 

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood 

products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. 

B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 

2. Species and Cut: White Maple, Plain Sliced. 

3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 

5. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only 

by mullions. 

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS 

1. Provide doors with glued-block cores. 

2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit 

abrasive planed before veneering. 

B. Fire-Rated Doors: 

1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or 

manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire 

rating indicated. 

a. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with 

improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings 

indicated 

2. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminatededge 

construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance 

and with outer stile matching face veneer. 

3. Pairs: Furnish formed-steel edges and astragals for pairs of fire-rated doors, 


a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors. 

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES 

A. Metal Louvers: 

1. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V. 

2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, hot-dip zinc 

coated and factory primed for paint finish. 

B. Fire Door Louvers: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and 

labeled for use in doors with fire rating of one and one-half hours and less. 

08211-3 




1. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, hot-dip zinc 

coated and factory primed for paint finish. 

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed 

of 0.0478-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed and approved 

for use in doors of fire rating indicated. 


A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. 

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform 

clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. 

Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to 

comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop 

Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify 

dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 

2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for 

pairs of fire-rated doors. 

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable 

requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 

2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING 

A. General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" 

for factory finishing. 

B. Finish doors at factory. 

C. Transparent Finish: 

1. Grade: Premium. 

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI 

System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 

3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 

5. Sheen: Satin. 



08211-4 




A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and 

swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 

2. Reject doors with defects. 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as 

indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or 

permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after 

fitting and machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of 

doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor 

finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 

mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. 

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge 

edges. 

3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles 

and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. 

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is 

required at Project site. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. 

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no 

evidence of repair or refinishing. 


08211-5 



SECTION 08311 

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes access doors and frames for ceilings. 


A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other 

work. 


A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain 

access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in 

the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. 


2.1 ALUMINUM MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6, mill finish. 

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6, mill finish. 

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 

1. Mill finish. 

2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS 




1. Acudor Products, Inc. 

2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 

08311 - 1 



3. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc. 

4. Cendrex Inc. 

5. Dur-Red Products. 

6. Elmdor/Stoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 

7. Jensen Industries. 

8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 

9. Karp Associates, Inc. 

10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

11. MIFAB, Inc. 

12. Milcor Inc. 

13. Nystrom, Inc. 

14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 

B. Aluminum Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from 

aluminum sheet and extruded-aluminum shapes. 

1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces. 

2. Door: Minimum 0.080-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick aluminum sheet. 

3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick extruded aluminum with 1-1/4-inch- 

(32-mm-) wide rolled flange. 

4. Hinges: Concealed continuous aluminum. 

5. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. 


A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units 

ready for installation. 

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, 

flat surfaces without blemishes. 

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 

Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to 

types of supports indicated. 

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane 

when closed. 

E. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective 

coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete. 



A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. 

08311 - 2 



B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face 

panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. 

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise 

damaged. 


08311 - 3 



SECTION 08332 

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 



2.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Insulated service doors. 

B. Related Section: 

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall 

withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within 

limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7. 

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide impact-protective 

overhead coiling doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested 

according to ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996. 

1. Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet (9.144 m) 

of grade. 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or 

detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, 

and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

08332 - 1 




A. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and 

that exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies. 

2.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Maintenance Data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and 

approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 


3.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, 

designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door 

without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical 

properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door 

indicated, and as follows: 

1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal 

insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes 

of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation 

completely within slat faces. 

2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. 

B. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1- 

1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; fabricated from metal to match curtain slats 

and finish. 

C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of 

same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient 

depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to 

withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on 

guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 

1. Removable Posts and Jamb Guides for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's 

standard. 

3.2 HOOD 

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating 

mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. 

08332 - 2 



Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surfacemounted 

hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects 

beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to 

prevent sagging. 

3.3 LOCKING DEVICES 

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, 

operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in 

tracks. 

1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to 

building keying system. 

2. Keys: Provide three for each cylinder. 

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. 

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to 

disengage power supply when door is locked. 

3.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES 

A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire 

perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM 

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with 

an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and 

contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use greasesealed 

bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled 

steel plate. 

3.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS 

A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another 

type of door operator is indicated. 

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and 

guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25 lbf (111 N) force for door operation. 

Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. 

08332 - 3 



3.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY 

A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking 

metal slats. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

Cornell Thermiser Insulated Rolling Service Door or comparable product by one 

of the following: 

a. ACME Rolling Doors. 

b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. 

c. AlumaTek, Inc. 

d. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. 

e. City-Gates. 

f. Cookson Company. 

g. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 

h. Dynamic Closures Corp. 

i. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. 

j. Mahon Door Corporation. 

k. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 

l. Metro Door. 

m. Overhead Door Corporation. 

n. QMI Security Solutions. 

o. Raynor. 

p. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. 

q. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 

r. Windsor Door. 

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 10,000. 

C. Curtain R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.792 K x sq. m/W)]. 

D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. 

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 15/16-inch. 

1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. 

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain 

slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to 

minimize operational noise. Provide removable post(s) and jamb guides where shown 

on Drawings. 

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 

1. Shape: Round. 

2. Mounting: Face of wall. 

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 

1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides locking bars, 

operable from inside with thumb turn, outside with cylinder. 

08332 - 4 



I. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator. 

J. Door Finish: 

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from 

manufacturer's full range. 



A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary 

hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to 

manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. 

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, 

free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended 

by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. 

4.2 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance 

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. 


08332 - 5 



SECTION 08412 

IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior large missile impact aluminum-framed entrance systems with flush 

glazing. 


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of 

withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 

1. Structural loads. 

2. Thermal movements. 

3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not 

limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated 

live loads. 

4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

5. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal 

and structural movements, to glazing. 

d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. 

e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. 

f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 

g. Sealant failure. 

h. Failure of operating units to function properly. 

B. Structural Sealant: Provide only the sealants used during testing of approved impacted 

specimens. 

C. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress in 

structural-sealant joints of less than 20 psi138 kPa. 

08412-1 




D. Structural Loads: 

1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum-framed entrance and storefront systems capable 

of withstanding wind pressures associated with basic wind speed of 130 mph. 

a. Importance Factor = 1.00. 

b. Exposure Category “C”. 

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to 

ASTM E 330 as follows: 

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do 

not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 

F. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed 

systems that pass large missile-impact tests and cyclic-pressure tests according to 

protocols required by the authorities having jurisdiction. 

G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal 


surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of 

materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 180 deg F100 deg C, material surfaces. 

H. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through 

fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. of fixed wall area when tested 

according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. 

ft.300 Pa. 

I. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that 

have been tested according to ASTM E 331 and meet SBCCI large missile impact 

testing standards of 10 lb/sq. ft. minimum. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract. 

1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, 

including: 

a. Manufacturer's published data sheets, signed, sealed (raised seal) and 

dated by Florida registered architect/engineer. Data sheets shall indicate 

size, materials, glazing system, type of anchors, spacing, and placement of 

anchors, details of head, jambs, and sill conditions for opening type (frame, 

masonry, etc.). 

b. Conformance test report from an industry recognized independent testing 

laboratory, attesting that the unit tested meets or exceeds the allowable 

structural loads and other performance conditions for which the unit was 

tested. 

c. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. 

08412-2 




2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, 

including: 

a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. 

b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale. 

c. Detail sections of typical composite members. 

d. Anchors and reinforcement. 

e. Hardware mounting heights. 

f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. 

g. Glazing details. 

3. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in 

manufacturer’s standard sizes. 

4. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance 

manuals. 

5. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering 

responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing 

entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is 

acceptable to manufacturer. 

1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, 

including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of 

manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this 

Project. 

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems 

produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those 

indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one 

source from a single manufacturer. 

D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional requirements 

of aluminum entrance and storefront work required and are based on the specific types 

and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may 

be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not 

change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality 

is on the proposer. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and 

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with 

construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

08412-3 




A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the 

Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract 

Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made 

by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 

B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to 

repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials 

or workmanship within the specified warranty period or periods listed below. Failures 

include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering 

2. Failure of operating components to function normally. 

3. Entrance door corner construction: lifetime. 

C. Warranty Period: 

1. 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

PART 2 - PART - PRODUCTS 





B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 


1. U.S. Aluminum Corporation 

2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 

3. EFCO Corporation. 

C. Products: Equal to Kawneer IR 501 Framing System – large missile impact insulated 

storefront system, with Kawneer 350 IR Entrances; Medium stile, 3-1/2 inch vertical 

face dimension, 1-3/4 inch depth, Interior structural silicone glazed, High traffic/impact 

resistant. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. 

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 211. 

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 

08412-4 




B. Steel Reinforcement: Provide steel when required and as determined by wind loads 

and the architectural aluminum manufacturer as per their tested/approved specimens 

and drawings. 

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer’s standard extruded-aluminum framing members of 

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength aluminum with 

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, 

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and 

structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking fasteners. 

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware 

application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match 

framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel 

inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. 

E. Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding 

flashing, compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet 

aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickeness to maintain a flat 

appearance without visible deflection. 

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer’s standard recommended by 

manufacturer for joint type. 

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS 

A. Glazing: Refer to Glazing Specification 8800. 

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard compression types, replaceable, molded or 

extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. 

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer’s standard elastomeric types. 

D. Bond Breaker Tape: Manufacturer’s standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethelyne 

material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. 

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by 

manufacturer for joint type and as follows: 

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible 

with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated 

and tested for use as structural sealant, and approved by structural-sealant 

manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems as indicated. 

08412-5 



a. Color: Black. 


2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, 

A, and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant 

and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by 

structural- and weatherseal-sealant and aluminum-framed system manufacturers 

for this use.Color: Matching structural sealant. 

2.5 DOORS 

A. Doors: Provide manufacturer’s standard glazed medium stile large missile impact door 

for manual swing operation. Equivalent to: Kawneer 350 IR Entrances; Medium stile, 3- 

1/2 inch vertical face dimension, 1-3/4 inch depth, Interior structural silicone glazed, 

High traffic / impact resistant. 

1. Door Construction: Doors shall have extruded tubular rail and stile members 

designed to meet specified performance requirements. 

2. Door Design: Medium stile large missile impact. 

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard stops and gaskets for 

assemblies designed to meet specified performance requirements. Exposed 

fasteners shall not be permitted on Exposed fasteners shall not be permitted on 

glass stops. 

2.6 HARDWARE 

A. General: Refer to Door Hardware specification 8711. 

B. Door Bottom Rail: Manufacturer's door bottom rail with an E.P.D.M. blade gasket 

sweep strip applied with concealed fasteners. 

C. Weatherstripping: Butt hung doors shall have weather-stripped door stops at frame 

jambs and header. 

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified 

in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”. 

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphaltic-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 


A. Glazing contractor must install all components of the project’s storefront and entrances 

per the manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

B. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 

C. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or 

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed 

surfaces by descaling or grinding. 

08412-6 




D. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the 

following characteristics: 

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing 

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 

5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing 

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to 

greatest extent possible. 

E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting 

stops). 

F. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using 

temporary support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant 

cures. 

G. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly per manufacturer’s 

requirements to meet specified performance requirements. 

H. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and 

for installing hardware. 

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 

I. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 

1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. 

J. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, 

drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. After fabrication, 

clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop 

Drawings. 

K. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project 

according to Shop Drawings. 

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal 

Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces 





08412-7 




C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

D. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. 



A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront 

systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. General: 

1. Install all components of large missile impact storefront and entrance systems 

per manufacturer’s installation instructions and impact resistant test criteria. 

2. Do not install damaged components. 

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and 

electrolytic deterioration. 

6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Metal Protection: 

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by 

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing 

nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by 

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing 

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 

Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. 

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, 

without warp or rack. 

F. Install glazing per manufacturer’s requirements to meet the specified performance 

requirements. 

1. Structural-Sealant Glazing: 

08412-8 




a. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant 

manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. 

Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 

b. Install weatherseal sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written 

instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant 

as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 

G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 

1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and 

weathertight closure. 

2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to 

hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to 

greatest extent possible. 

H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to 

produce weathertight installation. 

I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following 

maximum tolerances: 

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 

feet, 3 mm in 3.7 m; 1/4 inch over total length. 

2. Alignment: 

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch1.5 

mm. 

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 

inch0.8 mm. 

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 

inch3 mm. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware 

manufacturers' written instructions. 

1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 

3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position 

to 3 inches from the latch measured to the leading door edge. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care 

to avoid damage to coatings. 

B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the 

"Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing 

and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 


08412-9 




A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction 

period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or 

deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. 


08412-10 



SECTION 08710 

DOOR HARDWARE 


1.1 WORK INCLUDES: 

A. Finish Hardware 

Aluminum Door Hardware 

Thresholds 

Weather-stripping 

1.2 RELATED WORK 

A. Steel Doors and Frames Section 08100 

Flush Wood Doors Section 08210 

Aluminum Storefront Doors Section 08400 


A. STANDARDS: Manufacturers and model numbers listed are to establish 

a standard of quality. Similar items by approved manufacturers, unless 

otherwise noted, that are equal in design, finish and quality will be 

accepted upon prior approval of the architect and provided required data 

and physical samples are submitted at least ten (10) days prior to date of 

bid. Products listed as “No Substitute” are specified as such to match 

existing or by the Owners request. 

B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS: Hardware supplier must be engaged 

regularly in contracting work and be staffed to expedite work, the firm 

shall have been furnishing hardware on similar projects for not less than 

five years. The supplier must have in his employ a certified Architectural 

Hardware Consultant (AHC) to periodically inspect and direct detailing, 

setting, applying of all hardware items. 

C. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: Hardware for the project shall be 

installed by factory authorized personnel who have successfully 

completed factory training courses and shall be certified for the 

installation of locksets, door closers and exit devices. Prior to installation, 

the installer shall inspect all door frames for proper plum and square 

condition. General Contractor shall be notified of frames found out of 

square, plum or unsuitable for door installation at the installation meeting. 

D. PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE FOR MECHANICAL HARDWARE: 

08710 - 1 



Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section “Project Meeting.” Review methods and procedures 

related to mechanical door hardware, including but not limited to the 

following: 

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of 

materials, installer’s personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make 

progress an avoid delays. 

2. Present General Contractor with a written report of the condition of 

door frames in terms of squareness and any other condition that may 

impede the installation and operation of the doors and hardware. 

3. Review installer’s responsibilities for testing, inspecting and adjusting 

doors and hardware in accordance with 08710 Part 3 EXECUTION. 

1.4 REFERENCES 

A. ANSI/BHMA designations where used in schedules to describe hardware 

items or to define quality or function are derived from the following 

standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this section. 

1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1 (BHMA 101) 

2. Locks and Lock Trim: ANSI A156.2 (BHMA 601) 

3. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3 (BHMA 701) 

4. Door Controls: Closers: ANSI A156.4 (BHMA 301) 

5. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI A156.5 (BHMA 501) 

6. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6 (BHMA 1001) 

7. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7 

8. Door Controls: Overhead Holders: ANSI A156.8 (BHMA 311) 

9. Interconnected Locks & Latches: ANSI A156.12 (BHMA 311) 

10. Mortise Locks & Latches: ANSI A156.14 (BHMA 401) 

11. Sliding & Folding Door Hardware: ANSI A156.14 (BHMA 401) 

12. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI A156.16(BHMA 1201) 

13. Self Closing Hinges & Pivots: ANSI A156.17(BHMA 1101) 

14. Materials and Finishes: ANSI A156.18(BHMA 1301) 


A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Submit manufacturer’s product data for 

each item of hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary 

to show compliance with requirements, and instructions for installation 

and maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes. 

B. SCHEDULES: Submit six (6) copies of the finish hardware schedule for 

approval. Schedule format shall be similar to the one included at the end 

of Part 3 of this section. 

C. TEMPLATES: Whenever required, furnish templates to the necessary 

08710 - 2 



fabricators of other related work, which is to receive finish hardware, such 

as door and steel door frames and or aluminum doors and frames. 

E. CATALOG CUTS: Submit six (6) copies of catalog cuts of all products 

listed in the finish hardware schedule. 

F. KEYING SCHEDULE: The specific keying requirements should be noted 

elsewhere in this schedule. If these requirements are not noted then, it is 

the supplier’s responsibility to submit a keying schedule based on the 

format listed in the DHI annual Keying Procedures, Systems and 

Nomenclature. 

1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. MARKING & PACKAGING: Hardware should be required to be sent to 

the job site in the manufacturers original packages marked to correspond 

with the approved hardware schedule. 

B. Some items of hardware may have to be delivered to fabricators for 

factory installation. (i.e.: Aluminum Storefront). 

C. Storage and protection of the materials is the responsibility of the General 

Contractor. Proper storage methods are advised as protection of the 

material and finish as necessary. 

1.7 WARRANTIES 

A. All door closers shall have a ten (10) year warranty against defects in 

material and workmanship from the date of occupancy of the project. 

B. Exit hardware shall be warranted for a period of three (3) years against 

defects material and workmanship. 

C. All other products shall have a one (1) year warranty against defects in the 

material and workmanship from the date of occupancy of the project. 


2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS 

A. The following is a list of acceptable products: 

Products: Specified Manufacturers: Acceptable Manufacturers: 

HINGES MCKINNEY HAGER, LAWERENCE 

PIVOTS RIXON LCN 

08710 - 3 



FLUSH BOLTS ROCKWOOD HAGER, TRIMCO 

EXIT DEVICES CORBIN-RUSSWIN YALE, SARGENT 

CYLINDERS CORBIN-RUSSWIN YALE, SARGENT 

LOCKS CORBIN-RUSSWIN YALE, SARGENT 

ELECTRIC STRIKES FOLGER ADAM NO SUBSTITUTE 

POWER SUPPLIES SECURITRON FOLGER ADAM 

MAGNETIC LOCKS SECURITRON FOLGER ADAM 

PUSH-PULLS ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCO 

DOOR CLOSERS YALE NORTON 

KICK PLATES ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCO 

DOOR STOPS ROCKWOOD McKINNEY, TRIMCO 

THRESHOLDS PEMKO NAT. GUARD, McKINNEY 

W / S SETS PEMKO NAT. GUARD, McKINNEY 

DOOR BOTTOMS PEMKO NAT. GUARD, McKINNEY 

B. To the greatest extent possible, obtain materials from one manufacturer. 

Manufacturers listed above are intended to insure quality and design of 

the project. Other manufacturers submitted will be acceptable, provided 

they are equal or exceed standard of quality proposed for this project. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. SCREWS & FASTENERS: All screws and fasteners required for the 

hardware items are listed in the individual hardware sets. Any omission 

of these items should be reflected in the schedule submitted for approval. 

B. HINGES: Where hinges are specified unless otherwise noted they shall 

be of types and sizes as required by ANSI A156.1. SIZE HINGES 

ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. Provide 

stainless steel continuous hinges as listed in the hardware sets. 

C. PIVOTS: All pivots and/or pivot sets shall be the product of one (1) 

manufacturer. Sets as noted in the hardware groups shall be matching in 

design for aluminum storefront doors. The doors as noted in the 

hardware sets are to have intermediate pivots as well as top pivots. All 

pivot sets are required to meet ANSI Grade One standards as standard 

listed in ANSI A156.4, 1980. 

D. FLUSH BOLTS: Provide annual and automatic flush bolts as noted in the 

hardware sets. All flush bolts are required to meet ANSI A156.3. 

E. COORDINATOR & CARRY BARS: Provide coordinator and carry bars as 

noted in the hardware sets. Coordinators and carry bars are required to 

meet ANSI A156.2 TYPE 21. 

F. LOCKSETS & CYLINDERS: Provide lock sets and cylinders as noted in 

08710 - 4 



hardware sets. Lock sets shall meet ANSI A156.13, Grade One 

operational, Grade Two security, UL listed. Lock cases shall be field 

reversible without disassembly of lock case. Cylinders shall be 7 pin. 

G. LOCK TRIM: The design criteria selected for the lock set is as noted in 

the hardware sets. This is the acceptable design selected by the owner 

and intended for this project. 

H. EXIT DEVICES: Provide the series and type of exit devices as noted in 

the hardware sets. These exit devices are required to meet ANSI A156.3 

Grade One. All exit devices shall be of one manufacturer. 

I. DOOR CLOSERS: Provide the series and type of door closers as noted 

in the hardware sets. These door closers are required to meet ANSI 

A156.4 Grade One. All closers and power actuated closers shall be of 

one manufacturer. Plated finish door closers shall have plated arms and 

brackets. Painted finish door closers shall be powder coated. 

J. PUSH, PULL & KICK PLATE: Provide the type and size of these plates 

as noted in the hardware sets. These items are intended for the use and 

accessibility as protection of the openings indicated in the hardware 

schedule. 

K. DOOR STOPS & HOLDERS: Provide the types as noted in the hardware 

sets. Any variation in the job site conditions could change the type as 

specified. This should be reflected in the schedule submitted for 

approval. Install all floor stops so as not to interfere with pedestrian or cart 

traffic. Floor stops shall be installed within 12 inches of the pivot point of 

the door and frame assembly. 

L. THRESHOLD & WEATHER-STRIPPING: Provide the types as noted in 

the hardware sets. All exterior openings and interior fire rated openings 

shall have the necessary items to meet the local building code standards. 

Provide stainless steel screws at all locations. 

M. SILENCERS: Provide the type required to accommodate the hollow 

metal frames and wood frames fabricated for the project. 

2.3 FINISHES 

A. Provide the finishes as specified in the hardware schedule. Otherwise, 

provide matching finishes for the hardware items at each door opening to 

the greatest extent possible. Refer to the ANSI A156.18 for the 

identification of these finishes. 

08710 - 5 



2.4 KEYING 

A. Establish a new 7 pin removable core grand master key system at the 

direction of the Architect. Cylinders shall be restricted for use within a 150 

mile radius of the project. Provide temporary master keyed construction 

for use during construction. Coordinate replacement of construction cores 

with the designated representative of The City of LaBelle, Florida. 

B. Review with the Architect and/or owner all keying requirements. Submit 

key schedule in DHI written format for approval by the Architect and the 

Owner prior to factory order. 

C. Each key shall be marked and identified as directed by the Owner using 

the mechanical impact method of transferring the numerical impression to 

the key bow. Characters shall be consistent and uniform in their 

placement, alignment and depth of impression. Mark each key “DO NOT 

DUPLICATE”. 

D. Provide 3 factory cut change keys per lock, 2 master keys per group, 10 

pre-combinated cores and 10 key blanks. All factory cut and blank keys 

shall be restricted for use in the geographic area and be of nickel silver. 

Ship all permanent factory cut keys, key blanks and cylinders direct via 

registered US Mail to: the designated owners representative of: The City 

of LaBelle, Florida. 

2.5 KEY CONTROL 

A. KEY CABINET: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels 

tags, with self locking key clips, receipt forms, three-way visible card 

index, temporary markers and standard metal cabinet. Provide all of this 

material from one manufacturer and per that manufacturer’s system 

standard. Provide a system with the capacity for 150% of the number of 

cylinders and lock sets required for the project. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. After installation has been completed, the hardware supplier shall have a 

qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC); check the job to 

determine the proper application of hardware according to the approved 

08710 - 6 



hardware schedule and keying schedule. AHC shall also check the 

operation and adjustment of all hardware items. AHC shall submit a 

written report of specification compliance to the Architect with the close 

out documents required in 08710.3.4.A. 


A. Refer to the DHI manual publication for Recommended Locations for 

Builders Hardware, FLA ACCESSIBILITY CODE AND ADA 

REQUIREMENTS for instruction. Also, coordinate with the door suppliers 

for these locations. Install all hardware in compliance with manufacturer’s 

instruction and recommendations. Drill and countersink all items which 

are not factory prepared for fasteners. Cut and fit all thresholds and 

weather-stripping to profile of door frames. Set threshold in accordance 

with the application condition. 

3.3 OPERATIONS, MAINTENANCE AND TRAINING 

A. At completion of the project, provide the owner with a manual containing 

the following information: 

1. Final (as built) copy of hardware schedule. 

2. Final copy of keying schedule. 

3. Copy of product data sheets as submitted including all Warranty 

data. 

4. Parts list for Locksets, Door Closers and Exit Devices. 

5. Copy of installation instructions for each type of hardware used. 

6. Name, address and phone number of each manufacturer and 

local representative. 

7. Complete set of any specialized tools. 

8. Complete set of manufacturer warranty information for each 

hardware type. 

9. Written AHC compliance report as described in 08710.3.1.A 

B. At the completion of the project the supplier shall engage a factory 

authorized service representative to train the Owner’s maintenance 

personnel to adjust, operate and maintain door hardware, and lock 

systems provided in this section. 


A. The general contractor is responsible for the proper protection of all items 

of hardware until final acceptance of the project by the owner and the 

08710 - 7 



HARDWARE SET 1 

DOOR: 100 

architect. 

3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 

A. Hardware sets are as follows: 

3 ea HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 

1 ea EXIT DEVICE ED5860B PR955 630 

1 ea CYLINDER 630 

1 ea CLOSER PR3501 689 

1 ea DOOR STOP 471 630 

NOTES 

1. BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER. 


DOOR: 101 

4 ea HINGES T4A3786 4.5 X 4.5 630 

1 ea LOCK ML 2055 LC PSA 630 


1 ea CLOSER 3501 / PR3501 689 

1ea KICK PLATE K1050 8 X 2 LDW 630 

1 ea DOOR STOP 441CU 630 

Notes: 

1. SUPPLY AND INSTALL CLOSER ON NON PUBLIC SIDE OF DOOR. 


DOORS: 102, 103, 107A 

4 ea HINGES TA2714 4.5 X 4.5 630 




Notes: 

1. COORDINATE WOOD DOOR HARDWARE WITH ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING. 


DOORS: 104, 105, 106 

4 ea HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630 



1 ea CLOSER 3501 689 

1 ea KICK PLATE K1050 B4E 8 X 2 LDW 630 



DOOR: 107B 

08710 - 8 



4 ea HINGES T4A3786 4.5 X 4.5 630 



1 ea CLOSER 3501 / PR3501 689 

2ea KICK PLATE K1050 18” X 2 LDW 630 


1 ea W/S SET 315 CN LAR AL 

1 ea DOOR BOTTOMS 303 AS LAR AL 

1 ea THRESHOLD 2001AV LAR AL 

Notes: 

1. SUPPLY AND INSTALL CLOSER ON NON PUBLIC SIDE OF DOOR. 


DOORS: 108, 109 

3 ea HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 630 

1 ea LOCKSET ML2020 PSA 630 



1 ea MOP PLATE K1050 B4E 4 X 2 LDW 630 


DOORS:111A, 112A 

8 ea HINGES T4A3386 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 

1 ea LOCKSET ML 2057 LC PSA 630 


1 ea FLUSHBOLT 1845 630 



1 ea THRESHOLD 171A LAR AL 

2 ea DOOR BOTTOMS 430CRL LAR AL 

1 ea W/S SET 303 AS LAR AL 



DOORS: 111B, 113A, 113B 

4 ea HINGES T4A3386 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 

1 ea EXIT DEVICE ED5200S PR955 630 




1 ea THRESHOLD 2001 AV LAR AL 

1 ea DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN LAR AL 




DOOR: 112B 

8 ea HINGES T4A3386 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 

2 ea EXIT DEVICE ED 5470A PR955 630 

2 ea CYLINDER 



08710 - 9 



2 ea MOP PLATE K1050 B4E 4 X 2 LDW 630 

1 ea THRESHOLD 2001AV LAR AL 


2 ea DOOR BOTTOM 315 CN LAR AL 



DOORS: 113 C, D, E 

1 ea CYLINDER 

Notes: 

1. COORIDNATE CYLINDER WITH COILING OVERHEAD DOORS. 


08710 - 10 



SECTION 08800 

GLAZING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those 

specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to 

this Section: 

1. Windows. 

2. Storefront framing. 

3. Glazed entrances. 

4. Interior borrowed lites. 


A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis 

according to the Florida Building Code Current Edition by a qualified professional 

engineer, using the following design criteria: 

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, 

design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for shortduration 

load. 

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by 

differential shading within individual glass lites. 

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, 

tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to 

and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of 

current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 

B. LEED Submittals: 

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the 

weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. 

08800-1 



GLAZING 

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision 

glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square. 

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and 

location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

F. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product 

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this 

Section or in referenced standards. 

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" 

and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American 

Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and 

Residential Use." 

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark 

glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate 

manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which 

glass complies. 

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at 

least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard 

form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that 

deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as 

defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to 

maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in 

which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that 

deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined 

as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to 

maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing 

08800-2 



GLAZING 

vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminatedglass 

standard. 

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in 

which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that 

deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined 

as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or 

to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on 

interior surfaces of glass. 

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in 

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heattreated 

float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with 

"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, 

provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed 

to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is 

indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes enhancedprotection 

testing requirements of SSTD 12, ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E1996, 

ANSI/DASMA 115 (for garage doors and rolling doors) or Miami-Dade TAS 201, 202 

and 203 or AAMA 506. 

Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the 

Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 

1. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. 

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance 

properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on 

procedures indicated below: 

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on 

LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F 

(W/sq. m x K). 

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, 

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 

08800-3 



GLAZING 

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless 

otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS 

A. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying 

with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with "Windborne- 

Debris-Impact Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with 

other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency 

to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and 

installation. 

1. Construction: Laminate glass with the following to comply with interlayer 

manufacturer's written recommendations: 

a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. 

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as 

needed to comply with requirements. 

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 

2.4 INSULATING GLASS 

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass 

separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and 

complying with other requirements specified. 

1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 

2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS 

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness 

required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned 

neoprene, EPDM, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with 

ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight 

seal. 

08800-4 



GLAZING 

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by 

inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure 

applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: 

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and 

with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of 

insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of 

service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on 

testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions 

existing at time of installation. 

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more 

than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's 

designations. 

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, 

Type S, Grade NS, Class as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific 

application. 

2.7 GLAZING TAPES 

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids 

elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; 

with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers 

for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for 

products indicated below: 

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 

2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous 

pressure. 

3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to 

continuous pressure. 

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with 

adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary 

sealant. 

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in 

combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket 

manufacturer. 

08800-5 



GLAZING 

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, 

plus or minus 5. 

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass 

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement 

(side walking). 

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of 

size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum 

glazing sealant performance. 

2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES – INTERIOR GLAZING 

A. Glass Type: Clear float glass or heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float 

glass. 

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 

2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 

2.10 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES – EXTERIOR GLAZING 

A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating laminated glass. 

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch. 

2. Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6.0 mm. 

3. Outdoor Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass. 

4. Interspace Content: Air. 

5. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass. 

a. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm. 

b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090 inch (2.29 mm). 

6. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 

7. Visible Light Transmittance: 62 percent minimum. 

8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .29 maximum. 

9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .27 maximum. 

10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .35 maximum. 

11. Visible Light Refelctance Out: 10 percent maximum. 

12. Provide safety glazing labeling. 

13. Product Basis-of-Design – AGC Flat Glass North America – Exterior Lite – 1/4” 

Clear Comfort Ti-AC36#2, 1/2” Airspace, Interior Lite – 1/4” Clear/.090” PVB/1/4” 

Clear. 

08800-6 



GLAZING 


3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL 

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, 

gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, 

including those in referenced glazing publications. 

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation 

to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate 

sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged 

glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass 

with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and 

impair performance and appearance. 

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined 

by preconstruction testing. 

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin 

course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass 

lites. 

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 

mm). 

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving 

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and 

according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 

3.2 TAPE GLAZING 

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges 

are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch 

tapes to make them fit opening. 

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to 

jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads 

and sills. 

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not 

lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 

08800-7 



GLAZING 

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by 

inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against 

faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward 

centers of openings. 

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) 

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit 

openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely 

in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting 

blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense 

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable 

stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 

Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses 

in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting 

blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression 

gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression 

gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing 

bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket 

manufacturer. 

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, 

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent 

sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants 

cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth 

of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting 

or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed 

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. 

Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 

08800-8 



GLAZING 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact 

with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass 

manufacturer. 

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry 

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for 

buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing 

by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is 

damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 


08800-9 



SECTION 09111 

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following 

applications: 

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, 

etc.). 

2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 




A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that 

incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical 

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent 

testing agency. 

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing 

steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested 

in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 


2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL 

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, 


2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, 


2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59- 

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 

09111-1 




B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for 

attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 

5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to 


a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor. 

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from 

corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of 

type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times 

that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to 


C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch 

(4.12-mm) diameter. 

1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. 

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

2. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to 

reduce sound transmission. 

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 

D. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of 

main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. 

b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) and 0.0312 inch (0.79 

mm) studs nested at door jambs and for supporting ceramic tile substrates. 

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 

1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of 

finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure 

above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to 

accommodate depth of studs. 

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width 

indicated. 

09111-2 




1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with 

minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- 

(1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. 

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed 

to reduce sound transmission. 

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with 

minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum 

bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- 

(1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter 

wire. 

H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 

mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 

0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding 

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), 

nonperforated. 

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener 

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit 

steel stud size. 



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 

09111-3 




1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that 

apply to framing installation. 

3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated 

by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within 

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. 

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting 

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective 

means. 

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces 

hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support 

standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension 

members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling 

loads within performance limits established by referenced installation 

standards. 

3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. 

C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. 

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension 

systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring 

members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 

12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive 

finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at 

exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to 

structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions 

are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts 

penetrating partitions above ceiling. 

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, 

install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of 

finished assemblies. 

09111-4 




2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door 

frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb 

studs. 

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 

1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of 

control joint in finished assembly. 

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of 

overhead structure. 

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as 

required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills 

of openings to match framing required above door heads. 

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated 

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous 

from floor to underside of solid structure. 

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly 

indicated. 

6. Curved Partitions: 

C. Direct Furring: 

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent 

to arcs. 

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally 

along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, 

place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 

1. Screw to wood framing. 

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry 

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

D. Z-Furring Members: 

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically 

and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to 

wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or 

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short 

flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short 

flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space 

second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation 

to fit. 

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not 

more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 


09111-5 



SECTION 09220 

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath and solid-plaster 

bases. 


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior portland 

cement plaster (stucco). 




A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage 

from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and 

other causes. 


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. 

B. Exterior Plasterwork: 

1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use 

procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing 

coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 

3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster 

coat has occurred. 


09220-1 






one of the manufacturers specified. 

2.2 METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip 

galvanized zinc coating. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). 

b. Dale/Incor. 

c. Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries, Inc. 

d. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 

e. Unimast, Inc. 

2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat and Flat Self-furring Diamond. 

a. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m). 

B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper. 

1. Provide paper-backed lath in locations indicated on Drawings. 


A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories 

with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 

B. Extruded Aluminum Accessories: 

1. Channel Screed: Fabricated from aluminum alloy 6063-T5 with a clear 

anondized finish. Equivalent to “Fry Reglet Channel Screed”. 

2. “Corner Key: Fabricated from aluminum alloy 6063-T5 with a clear anondized 

finish. Equivalent to “Fry Reglet Corner Key”. 

C. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 

1. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases 

indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. 

a. Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of 

damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. 

B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 

09220-2 




C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. 

2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 

1. Color for Finish Coats: Manufacturer’s standard. 

B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. 

C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 

1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White. 

2.6 PLASTER MIXES 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat 

plasterwork as follows: 

1. Portland Cement Mixes: 

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 

3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of 

cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component 

material). 

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 

to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious 

material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 

C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two-coat 

plasterwork as follows: 

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 

3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious 

material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 

D. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: 

1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement 

and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of 

cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 



A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements 

and other conditions affecting performance. 

09220-3 





corrected. 


A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful 

effects caused by plastering. 

B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability 

required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 


A. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster 

assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet 

accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 

3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 

1. Soffit Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 

2. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install Flat-self-furring diamond-mesh 

lath. 

3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. 

B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 

1. Install corner keys at exterior locations. 

C. Control Joints: Install channel screed for control joints at locations indicated on 

Drawings. 

3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m) from 

a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) 

straightedge placed on surface. 

2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or 

accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where 

casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from 

metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 

3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. 

B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. 

09220-4 




C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish. 

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to 

restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, 

buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar 

defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 


A. Protect the metal finishes of the plaster reveal trim for exposed finish. 

B. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster 

from doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair 

floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during 

plastering. 


09220-5 



SECTION 09250 

GYPSUM BOARD 





Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 

2. Tile backing panels. 


1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in assemblies that 

incorporate gypsum board. 

2. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing 

and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 

3. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 




A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide 

materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to 


1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage 

from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. 

Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board 

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 

09250-1 



GYPSUM BOARD 

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are 

mold damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited 

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 


2.1 PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that 

postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content 

constitutes a minimum of 20 percent by weight. 

B. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each 

area and that correspond with support system indicated. 

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable 

to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, 

but are not limited to, the following: 

a. American Gypsum Co. 

b. BPB America Inc. 

c. G-P Gypsum. 

d. Lafarge North America Inc. 

e. National Gypsum Company. 

f. PABCO Gypsum. 

g. Temple. 

h. USG Corporation. 

B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and 

surfaces. 

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

2.3 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 



09250-2 



GYPSUM BOARD 

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 

b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 

c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 

3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 

2. Shapes: 

a. Cornerbead. 

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 

c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 

d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 

e. Expansion (control) joint. 

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is 

compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface 

areas, use setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, 

fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim 

accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping 

compound or drying-type, or all-purpose compound high-build interior coating 

product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of 

skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. 

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 

1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 

09250-3 



GYPSUM BOARD 

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards 

and manufacturer's written recommendations. 

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering 

gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members 

from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size 

recommended by panel manufacturer. 

D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 



A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal 

frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions 

affecting performance. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, 

and mold damaged. 


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and 

to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints 

of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and 

ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not 

force into place. 

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where 

intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. 

Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on 

09250-4 



GYPSUM BOARD 

opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of 

framed openings. 

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum 

panels. 

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above 

ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or 

smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. 

ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of 

floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural 

members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at 

these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. 

Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is 

attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at 

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install 

acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. 

Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for 

locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, 

including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 

1. Mold and Moisture Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. Single-Layer Application: 

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to 

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless 

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize 

end joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate 

courses of panels. 

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a 

substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), 

09250-5 



GYPSUM BOARD 

comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily 

brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. 

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. 

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to 

produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same 

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations 

approved by Architect for visual effect. 

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. LC-Bead: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 

3. L-Bead: Install in locations indicated on drawings. 

4. U-Bead: Install in locations indicated on drawings. 

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, 

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare 

gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from 

adjacent surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not 

intended for tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to 

ASTM C 840: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 

3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

4. Level 5: Apply this level of finish to areas exposed to view which cannot 

adequately conceal imperfections with a Level 4 finish. 

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

09250-6 



GYPSUM BOARD 


A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, 

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. 

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited 

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 


09250-7 



SECTION 09310 

TILING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Porcelain floor tile. 

2. Ceramic wall tile. 

3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 

B. Samples: 

1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 

2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and 

finish of tile. 




apply for product selection: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product 

named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named 

product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with 

ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other 

characteristics indicated. 

B. Glazed Ceramic Wall Tile: 

1. Manufacturer: American Olean – Profiles - 8”x10” Glazed Ceramic Wall tile, color 

“Biscuit” 091. 

C. Unglazed Porcelain Floor Tile: 

1. Manufacturer: American Olean – St. Germain - 12”x24” Colorbody Porcelain 

Floor tile, color “Noir” SE 68. 

09310-1 



TILING 

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel 

edges at 1:2 slope, limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel 

to match face of threshold. 

1. Stone Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per 

ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 

a. Description: Closely color match the color of the floor tile. 

2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS 

A. Basis of Design Products: 

1. Grouting Materials: Water cleanable, reactive resin grout with chemical stain 

resistance. ANSI A118.3. Equivalent to Mapei “Opticolor Stain Free Grout”. 

2. Wall setting and floor setting materials - Thin-Set Mortar: Rapid setting, flexible, 

polymer modified thin set mortar ANSI-A118.4 and ANSI-A118.11. Equivalent to 

Mapei “Granirapid”. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland 

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting 

materials. 



A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain 

soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. 

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound 

according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. 

C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at 

Project site before installing. 

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or 

needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat 

them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat 

unexposed tile surfaces. 

09310-2 



TILING 


A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series 

"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and 

grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply 

with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form 

complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work 

neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint 

alignments. 

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without 

marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. 

Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, 

collars, or covers overlap tile. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in patterns indicated in drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 

Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out 

tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. 

Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during 

installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after 

installing tiles. 

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 



G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 

1. Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch. 

I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of 

setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed 

would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. 

J. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 

1. 1/16 inch installed with the 8 inch tile dimension installed vertically and all joints 

aligned. 

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior floor installation over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCA F-113-03. 

1. Unglazed porcelain floor tile: Porcelain floor tile. Equivalent to American Olean – 

St. Germain – 12” x 24” – color: “Noir” SE68. 

09310-3 



TILING 

2. Thin-Set Mortar: Rapid setting, flexible, polymer modified thin set mortar ANSI- 

A118.4 and ANSI-A118.11. Equivalent to Mapei “Granirapid”. 

3. Grout: Water cleanable, reactive resin grout with chemical stain resistance. 

ANSI A118.3. Equivalent to Mapei “Opticolor Stain Free Grout”. Color 47 

“Charcoal”. 

3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior wall tile installation over cementitious backer board on metal stud framing; thinset 

mortar; TCA B-412 except as modified below with the mortar and grout products. 

1. Glazed wall tile: 8” x 10” glazed ceramic wall tile. Equivalent to American Olean – 

Profiles – 8” x 10” – color “Biscuit” 091. 

2. Thin-Set Mortar: Rapid setting, flexible, polymer modified thin set mortar ANSI- 

A118.4 and ANSI-A118.11. Equivalent to Mapei “Granirapid”. 

3. Grout: Water cleanable, reactive resin grout with chemical stain resistance. 

ANSI A118.3. Equivalent to Mapei “Opticolor Stain Free Grout”. Color 14 

“Biscuit”. 


09310-4 



SECTION 09511 

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 


A. AC: Articulation Class. 

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. 

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. 

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 




A. Source Limitations: 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

a. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and 

supporting suspension system through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project 

site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned 

09511-1 




space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, 

temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a 

stabilized moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any 

way. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are 

enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above 

ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained 

at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with 

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light 

fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are 

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity 

installed. 

2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal 

to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 




the manufacturers specified. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration 

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, 

patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for 

each product type. 

09511-2 




1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by 

referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' 

proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from 

each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, 

pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 

2.3 MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING 

A. Available Products: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. – “Cirrus” Pattern 

2. USG Corporation – “Eclipse ClimaPlus” 

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern 

as follows: 

1. Type and Form: Type III, Form 1. 

2. Pattern: E (lightly textured) I (embossed) As indicated by manufacturer's 

designation. 

C. Color: White. 

D. LR: Not less than 0.80. 

E. NRC: Not less than 0.65. 

F. CAC: Not less than 35. 

G. AC: Not less than 170. 

H. Edge Detail: Square. 

I. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 

J. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 

K. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide if available. 

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung 

metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated 

that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for 

Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating 

finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system 

indicated. 

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, 

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 

09511-3 




1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for 

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or 

other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with 

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by 

ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a 

qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following 

requirements: 

1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft 

temper. 

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load 

(ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but 

provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. 

E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 

0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 

G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) 

diameter bolts. 

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING 

A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners 

roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip 

galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating 

designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. 

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 

3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 

4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 

5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM 


1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. USG Interiors, Inc. 

B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not 

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit 

acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet 

metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of 

suspension system runners. 


09511-4 





A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which 

acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and 

anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 



A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border 

widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at 

borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per 

manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within 

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension 

system. 

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting 

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces 

hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to 

support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension 

members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size 

supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within 

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with 

a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to 

inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for 

substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or 

elevated temperatures. 

5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member 

supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not 

more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area 

and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 

mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling 

suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter 

corners accurately and connect securely. 

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with 

one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

09511-5 




E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension 

system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations 

to provide a neat, precise fit. 

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by 

flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, 

and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for 

cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling 

components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate 

evidence of damage. 


09511-6 



SECTION 09912 

PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and 

interior items and surfaces. 

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in 

addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or 

material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not 

specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials 

or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard 

colors and finishes available. 

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts 

(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces 

of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final 

finish. 

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating 

parts, and labels. 

1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: 

a. Architectural woodwork. 

b. Acoustical wall panels. 

c. Metal toilet enclosures. 

d. Metal lockers. 

e. Unit kitchens. 

f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. 

g. Elevator equipment. 

h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. 

i. Light fixtures. 

2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally 

inaccessible spaces: 

a. Foundation spaces. 

b. Furred areas. 

09912-1 




c. Ceiling plenums. 

d. Utility tunnels. 

e. Pipe spaces. 

f. Duct shafts. 

g. Elevator shafts. 

3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: 

a. Anodized aluminum. 

b. Stainless steel. 

c. Chromium plate. 

d. Copper and copper alloys. 

e. Bronze and brass. 

4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: 

a. Valve and damper operators. 

b. Linkages. 

c. Sensing devices. 

d. Motor and fan shafts. 

5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment 

name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

D. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and 

frames. 

2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of 

gypsum board. 


A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when 

measured at an 85-degree meter. 

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when 

measured at a 60-degree meter. 

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 

when measured at a 60-degree meter. 

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when 

measured at a 60-degree meter. 


A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each 

material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. 

Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general 

classification. 

09912-2 




2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label 

analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating 

material. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 

1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings 

similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work 

has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the 

same manufacturer as the finish coats. 

C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each 

type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. 

Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 

1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for 

application of each type of coating and substrate. 

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide up to four (4) samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. 

m). 

b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, 

after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 

Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. 

a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to 

evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and 

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 

1. Product name or title of material. 

2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 

3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 

4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 

5. Thinning instructions. 

6. Application instructions. 

7. Color name and number. 

8. VOC content. 

09912-3 




B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a 

minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a 

clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags 

and waste daily. 


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and 

surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). 

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and 

surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). 

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 

percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to 

damp or wet surfaces. 

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be 

painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by 

manufacturer during application and drying periods. 


A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and 

in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and 

identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 

1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. 

(3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. 



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in 

other Part 2 articles. 

B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following 

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 

2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 

3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are 

compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of 

09912-4 




service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field 

experience. 

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating 

types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for 

application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product 

identification will not be acceptable. 

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to 

designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are 

required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other 

manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of 

performance for proposed substitutions. 

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.3 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS 

A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block 

fillers. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Latex Block Filler No. M88: Applied at a dry film 

thickness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm). 

2. ICI Dulux Paints; Bloxfil 4000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block 

Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils (0.178 to 

0.368 mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a 

dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.203 mm). 

2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS 

A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex 

primer for exterior application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Masonry Sealer No. 077: Applied at a dry film 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2000-1200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic 

Latex Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 

mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Exterior Masonry Acrylic Primer A24W300: Applied at 

a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 

B. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior 

application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. 

Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: 


C. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for 

exterior application. 

09912-5 




1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry 

film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: 


3. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of 

not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 

4. Thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 mm). 

2.5 INTERIOR PRIMERS 

A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex 

interior primer for interior application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer 

Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 

mm). 

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 3030-1200 Bond-Prep Interior/Exterior Waterborne Pigmented 

Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.046 

mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied at a dry film 


B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior 

application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer 

Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 

mm). 

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: 


3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at 

a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 

C. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkydbased 

metal primer. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied 

at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: 


2.6 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Exterior Elastomeric: Factory-formulated Elastomeric Coating System for exterior 

application. Basis of Design as follows: 

1. ICI Dulux Paints; 2260 Smooth “Decra-flex Elastomeric Coating System: Applied 

at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 dry mils. 

B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acryliclatex 

enamel for exterior application. 

09912-6 




1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic 

Semi-Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 

mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness 

of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 

2.7 INTERIOR FINISH COATS 

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior 

application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry 

film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 

2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex 

Wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils 

(0.036 mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: 


B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior 

enamel. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & 

Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 

mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: 


C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for 

interior application. 

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: 


2. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall 

& Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 

mm). 

3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 

B31W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 

mm). 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with 

requirements for paint application. 

09912-7 




1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and 

conditions within a particular area. 

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure 

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information 

on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified 

over substrates primed by others. 


A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, 

lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If 

removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide 

surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items 

removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. 

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of 

substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease 

before cleaning. 

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the 

cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to 

manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as 

specified. 

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 

2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, surfaces to be 

painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release 

agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have 

been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 

a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing 

appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish 

paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not 

paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's 


3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been 

shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign 

substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with 

SSPC's recommendations. 

a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment 

wash coat before priming. 

b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been 

damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint 

manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 

09912-8 




4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based 

solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove 

pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by 

mechanical methods. 

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's 


1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of 

foreign materials and residue. 

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as 

required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, 

remove surface film and strain material before using. 

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended 

limits. 

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when 

multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the 

finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each 

separate coat. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators 

and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint 

schedules. 

2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or 

conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in 

fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar 

components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to 

maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar 

exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind 

permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible 

through registers or grilles. 

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match 

exposed surfaces. 

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior 

faces. 

9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or 

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before 

subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of 

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured 

as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, 

09912-9 




even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between 

applications. 

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup 

painted. 

3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply 

additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give 

special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed 

fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not 

recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or 

feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat 

of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other 

applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of 

appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as 

recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as 

recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's 

recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry 

film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. 

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to 

items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. 

F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Uninsulated metal piping. 

2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 

3. Pipe hangers and supports. 

4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 

5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets 

and outlets. 

6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable 

jacket material. 

7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field 

painting. 

G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Switchgear. 

2. Panelboards. 

3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field 

painting. 

4. Exposed Conduit. 

H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete 

coverage with pores filled. 

09912-10 




I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by 

manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not 

been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of 

suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no 

burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 

J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a 

smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. 

Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other 

surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 

K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no 

evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface 

imperfections. 

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, 

refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other 

discarded paint materials from Project site. 

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove 

spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging 

adjacent finished surfaces. 


A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from 

painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as 

approved by Architect. 

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting 

operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their 

work. 

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced 

painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Portland Cement Plaster and Exposed Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following 

finish systems over properly cured exterior Portland cement plaster: 

1. Elastomeric Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

2. Primer: As recommended by the paint manufacturer. 

3. Finish Coats: Elastomeric Coating System: Applied at a dry film thickness of not 

less than 7.0 dry mils. 

09912-11 




B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is 

not required on shop-primed items. 

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 

C. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal 

surfaces: 

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal 

primer. 

a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 

3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete 

masonry: 

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over block filler. 

a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 

B. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board 

ceilings surfaces: 

1. Interior Latex Flat: Two finish coats over a primer. 

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior latex flat. 

C. Gypsum Board Walls: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board 

surfaces: 

1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. 

b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 

D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. 


E. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal 

surfaces: 

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 

09912-12 



a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. 




09912-13 



SECTION 09960 

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes the following: 

1. High-performance coating systems for above grade exterior surfaces applied to 

the Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco). 

2. High-performance coating systems for the below grade interior pipe trench 

concrete walls. 



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated. 

C. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by coating system manufacturer certifying that Installer is 

approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install the coating system. 

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by coating manufacturer certifying that coating 




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by the 

coating system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to 


experience in successfully installing the same coating materials. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has a coating system 

identical to that used for this Project. Coating system materials shall be supplied by a 

single manufacturer which has been successfully producing the specified types of primary 

products for not less than 5 years. 

09960 - 1 



C. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with the manufacturer’s written instructions for 

handling and application of the specified coating system. 

D. Material Compatibility: Provide coating materials that are compatible with the proposed 

substrate and under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by 

coating manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

E. Manufacturer Requirements: Ensure that the primary coating materials manufacturer 




F. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify 

preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 

and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for 

application of each type of coating and substrate. 

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional 

benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added 

cost to Owner. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Exterior Coating System Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s Standard 

Warranty Form for coating system products, including affirmation of coating system 

inspection by manufacturer required by warranty provisions. Approval by manufacturer for 

warranty is required prior to system application. This warranty is in addition to, and not a 

limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the contract. 

1. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project owner. 

2. Warranty Period: 10 years commencing on date of substantial completion. 

3. Warranty Areas: All surfaces receiving the specified exterior coating system. 


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with 

ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than the manufacturer’s written 

requirements. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 

09960 - 2 




A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air 

temperatures are within the acceptable temperature limits defined by the coating 

manufacturer’s written guidelines. 

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; and when relative humidity exceeds 

the limits defined by the coating manufacturer’s written guidelines. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) 

as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels 

describing contents. 

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each 

material and color applied. 


2.1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with 

one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application 

as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. 

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range matching Architect's 

samples. 

2.2 HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS PRIMER (EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT 

PLASTER) 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thoro 

Primer 2K Surface Conditioner / Primer as manufactured by BASF or a comparable 

product. 

2.3 HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS SEALANTS (EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT 

PLASTER) 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thorolastic 

Knife Grade Sealant as manufactured by BASF or a comparable product. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thorolastic 

Brush Grade Sealant as manufactured by BASF or a comparable product. 

09960 - 3 



C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sikaflex 15 

LM Polyurethane Sealant, as manufactured by Sika Corporation or a comparable product. 

2.4 HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS FINISH COAT (EXTERIOR PORTLAND CEMENT 

PLASTER) 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thorocoat 

100% Acrylic emulsion coating (fine texture) as manufactured by BASF or a comparable 

product. 

2.5 CEMENT BASED COATING FOR WATERPROOFING CONCRETE AND MASONRY 

(INTERIOR FACE OF PIPE TRENCH CONCRETE WALLS) 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Thoroseal 

cement based waterproof coating as manufactured by BASF or a comparable product. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Waterplug 

Fast Setting Mortar as manufactured by BASF or a comparable product. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with 

requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of 

work. 

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic 

moisture meter as required by manufacturer’s written guidelines. 

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 

3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected and surfaces are dry. 

4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to 

substrates indicated. 

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be 

coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide 

surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 

1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use 

workers skilled in the trades involved. 

09960 - 4 



C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, 

grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as 

required to produce coating systems indicated. 

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and 

chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated 

exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk by pressure washing or other method 

recommended by coating manufacturer. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or 

alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

F. Cast-in-place Concrete Trench Wall: Repair voids, cracks and holes in the finished 

concrete walls with Thoro Waterplug ultra rapid setting repair mortar in accordance with 

the manufacturer’s written recommendations. 

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 

B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush 

marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines 

and color breaks. 

3.4 APPLICATION OF SPECIFIED EXTERIOR COATING PRODUCT 

A. Prime all exterior above grade exposed split-face concrete masonry units with Thoro 

Primer 2K surface conditioner, applied at 200-300 sq.ft. per gallon. 

B. Seal all through wall penetrating items, mechanically fastened fixtures, louvers, etc., using 

specified polyurethane sealant, Sikaflec 15 LM. 

C. Clean and seal cracks over 1/16 inch in width with Thorlosatic Knife Grade Sealant 

applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

D. Cracks less than 1/16 inch in width and all cracks previously sealed with Thorlosatic Knife 

Grade Sealant will be coated with 3 – 4 inch wide band of Thorolastic Buttering Grade 

Sealant at a maximum coverage of 100 lf / gallon, and in accordance with manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

E. For the first coat, apply by ¾ inch nap roller, or plaster type sprayer, at a rate of 80 to 100 

sq.ft. per gallon (dry mil thickness 7.75). If sprayed, backroll after application. 

F. Let first coat dry for the manufacturer’s recommended period, but not less than 24 hours. 

09960 - 5 



G. Apply the second coat in the same manner as the first coat. If sprayed, the second coat 

does not need to be backrolled. Coating should be applied at the rate of 80 to 100 sq.ft. 

per gallon (dry mil thickness 7.75). 

H. Dampen all tools to be used prior to application. When rolling aggregate textures, clean 

rollers periodically to eliminate build-up. Use roller screen to even the material on the 

roller cover. 

3.5 APPLICATION OF SPECIFIED INTERIOR PIPE TRENCH COATING PRODUCT 

A. Clean all surfaces. Remove all traces of formwork, release agents, previous coatings, 

laitance and any contaminants than may affect the bond adversely. 

B. Refer to manufacturer’s written instructions for suitable cleaning methods. 

C. Cracks and bolt holes must be cut out and filled solid with Thoro Waterplug. 

D. Blend Thoroseal ingredients as indicated in manufacturer’s written instructions. 

E. Apply two coats in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials 

from Project site. 

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered 

coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent 

finished surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by 

cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 

undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced coated surfaces. 


09960 - 6 



SECTION 10200 

LOUVERS AND VENTS 

GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Fixed aluminum louvers. 

B. See Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal 

doors. 

C. See Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment. 


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design 

criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without 

permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver 

blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. 

A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, 

as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, 

except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. 

B. Dade County Protocols: 

1. TAS-201: Large and small missile impact. 

2. TAS-202: Criteria for testing impact and not impact resistant building envelope 

components using static uniform air pressure. 

3. TAS-203: Criteria for testing products subject to cyclic wind pressure. 



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing 

specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. 

10200-1 




B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, 

and spacing. 

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 

A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and 

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L. 

PRODUCTS 

9.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as 

required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required 

finish. 

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 

1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. 

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 


A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with 

allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material 

tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 

B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded 

fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or 

size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members 

necessary. 

9.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS 

A. Storm Resistive Louver: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

Construction Specialties Model DC-5304 or comparable product by one of the 

following: 

a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). 

b. All-Lite Architectural Products. 

c. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

d. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 

10200-2 




2. Louver Depth: 5 inches. 

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.060 inch for blades and 

0.081 inch for frames. 

4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 

10.2 LOUVER SCREENS 

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 

B. Louver Screen Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which 

screens are attached. 

C. Louver Screening: 

1. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 5/8 inch thick. 


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 1 mil thick full strength 70 percent fluoropolymer 

coating complying with AAMA 2605. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed 

metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

EXECUTION 


A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with 

adjacent work. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to 

screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight 

connection. 

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, 

as indicated. 

D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that 

cannot be refinished in the field to the factory and refinish entire unit or provide new 

units. 

E. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, 

masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy 

coating of bituminous paint. 


10200-3 



SECTION 10431 

SIGNS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Panel signs. 

2. Dimensional characters (letters and numbers) for exterior use. 

3. Cast-metal plaques. 

4. Signage accessories. 

5. Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of 

available typestyles and graphic symbols. 


1. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of 

individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members 

and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, 

spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 

1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, 

lettering, artwork, and Braille layout. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves 

color selection. 

1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required. 

D. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in 

maintenance manuals. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and 

with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 

10431-1 



SIGNS 

1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations 

and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 16. 


A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces 

on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication 

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of 

anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices 

and similar items to be used for attaching signs. 

1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates 

for installation of anchorage devices. 





1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each sign is based on the product 



2.2 PANEL SIGNS 

A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, 

thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 

1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed 

conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured 

diagonally. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Mohawk Signage Systems Series 200A-Sand Carved using 

format “D” or a comparable product of one of the following: 

C. Available Manufacturers: 

1. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 

2. American Graphics Inc. 

3. Andco Industries Corp. 

4. APCO Graphics, Inc. 

5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 

10431-2 



SIGNS 

6. Best Manufacturing Co. 

7. Grimco, Inc. 

8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

9. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 

10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc. 

11. Mohawk Sign Systems. 

12. Seton Identification Products. 

13. Signature Signs, Inc. 

14. Supersine Company (The). 

D. Melamine Plastic Laminate: Melamine plastic laminate, approximately 1/8” thick with 

contrasting core color. The melamine shall be non-static, fire-retardant and selfextinguishing. 

E. Letterform: Gil Sans or other sans serif or simple serif letterforms. 

F. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly 

finished to comply with the following requirements: 

1. Edge Condition: Square cut, edge color same as face. 

2. Corner Condition: Square. 

3. Copy position: Centered. 

4. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 

G. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements 

indicated in the Sign Schedule for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and 

location, material, finishes, and colors of signage. 

H. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy 

complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be 

accompanied by Grade 2 braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut 

edges free from burrs and cut marks. 

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: A.R.K. Ramos Signage Systems Standard Cast Letters 

“Optima Semi-bold” Font, 16 inch height, and “paw print” logo indicated on the 

drawings or a comparable product of one of the following: 

B. Available Manufacturers: 


2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 

3. Charleston Industries, Inc. 

4. Gemini Incorporated. 

5. Grimco, Inc. 

6. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

7. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 

8. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. 


10. Mohawk Sign Systems. 

11. Signature Sign Signs, Inc. 

12. Southwell Co. (The). 

10431-3 



SIGNS 

C. Cast Characters: Form individual letters, logos and numbers by casting. Produce 

characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and 

profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of 

characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements 

indicated for finish, style, and size. 

1. Material: Aluminum. 

D. Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 

mm) with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications. 

2.4 CAST-METAL PLAQUES 

A. General: Provide castings free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. 

Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and 

finish and in required thickness, size, shape, and copy. 


1. A.R.K. Ramos. 


3. Gemini Incorporated. 

4. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 

5. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. 


7. Southwell Co. (The). 

C. Cast Plaques: Provide castings free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects, as 

follows: 

1. Plaque Material: Aluminum. 

2. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard matte texture. 

3. Border Style: Raised flat band. 

4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. 

D. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by 

sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. 

E. Size: Building Dedication Plaque: 18 inches by 24 inches. Content to include up to 300 

characters in Optima Semi-bold Font. 

2.5 PANEL SIGN TYPES 

A. Restroom signs shall be ADA-4, size 8” x 8”, with a 4” accessibility symbol, gender 

symbol and the written description placed directly below by grade 2 braille. 

B. Warning signs shall be of a size required by the authorities having jurisdiction, but not 

less than 8” x 8”, with the written indication of the warning, and if required by the 

authorities having jurisdiction, a graphic symbol of the indicated warning. 

10431-4 



SIGNS 


A. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) minimum 

thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and 

interior applications. 

B. Mounting Methods: Use double-sided vinyl tape fabricated from materials that are not 

corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. 

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and 

inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 

Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish 

inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL 



B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 


are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable 

variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other 

components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are 

assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 


A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or 

thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish. 

B. Cast-Metal Plaque Finishes: 

1. Raised Areas: Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce 

manufacturer's standard satin finish. 

2. Background Finish: Painted. 




requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of 

work. 

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are 

sized and located to accommodate signs. 

10431-5 



SIGNS 

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or 

required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other 

deleterious matter. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of 

types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from 

distortion and other defects in appearance. 

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where 

applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs 

on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of 

sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. 

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods 

indicated below: 

1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, 

nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods 

recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall 

construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to 

establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 

1. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface 

indicated. 

D. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods recommended 

in writing by manufacturer for type of wall surface indicated. 

1. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped 

lugs on back of plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. 


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 

3.4 SIGN SCHEDULE 

A. Sign Type A: Adult Male Toilet Room Sign. 

1. Sign Size: 8” x 8”. 

2. Material: Melamine Plastic Laminate 

3. Background Finish/Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range 

of colors. 

4. Character Finish/Color: White. 

10431-6 



SIGNS 

5. Character Size: 1” unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

6. Text/Message/Symbol: MEN. International Symbol of Accessibility and Braille. 

Male Gender Symbol. 

7. Locations: Men’s Restrooms # 123. 

B. Sign Type B: Adult Female Toilet Room Sign. 

1. Sign Size: 8” x 8”. 






6. Text/Message/Symbol: FEMALE. International Symbol of Accessibility and 

Braille. Female Gender Symbol. 

7. Locations: Women’s Restrooms # 124. 

8. Quantity: One. 

C. Sign Type C: Room Name and Number Signs. 

1. Sign Size: 4” x 8” or larger if required by authorities having jurisdiction or if 

required to fit content. 






6. Locations: One per doorway into each room. 

D. Sign Type D: Hours of Operation Signage. 

1. Die-cut vinyl characters Material: Die-cut vinyl characters 

2. Character Finish/Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of 

colors. 

3. Character Size: 1 inch tall 

4. Locations: On the glass adjacent to the handle side of the front door. 

E. Sign Type E: Exterior Building Signage. 

1. Sign Size: 16 inch tall cast characters – refer to drawings. 

2. Sign graphics – “City of LaBelle Water Works” - Refer to drawings. 

3. Material: Cast aluminum characters for the letters. 

4. Character Finish/Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of 

colors. 

5. Locations: Refer to drawings. 

6. Mounting: Projected stud mounting. 

F. Sign Type F: Building Plaque. 

1. Sign Size: 4’-0” wide by 3’-0” tall. 

2. Sign graphics – Elliptical Shaped City of LaBelle municipal sign. 

3. Material: Cast aluminum. 

4. Character Finish/Color: To match the City of LaBelle municipal logo art work and 

colors. 

5. Locations: Refer to drawings. 


10431-7 



SIGNS 

G. Sign Type G: Building Dedication Plaque. 

1. Sign Size: 18 inch wide by 24 inch tall. 

2. Sign graphics – Provide up to 300 characters. Actual artwork to be provided by 

the Architect at a later date. 

3. Material: Cast aluminum. 

4. Locations: Adjacent to the front entrance doors. 



10431-8 



SECTION 10520 

FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Portable fire extinguishers. 

2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: 

a. Portable fire extinguishers. 



individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 

2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing 

mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, 

door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 

B. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in 

maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one 


B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, 

"Portable Fire Extinguishers." 

C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an 

independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 


10520-1 




A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire 

extinguishers indicated are accommodated. 





1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product 



2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 1.5 mm 

thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 

C. Acrylic Bubble: One piece. 

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 


1. Amerex Corporation. 

2. Ansul Incorporated. 

3. Badger Fire Protection. 

4. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 

5. JL Industries, Inc. 

6. Kidde Fyrnetics. 


8. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 

B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection 

cabinet indicated. 

1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10# nominal capacity, with 

monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled 

container. 

2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Larsen’s Fire Extinguisher Cabinet, model FS C2409-6R- 

Semi-recessed or a comparable product by one of the following: 

10520-2 





1. JL Industries, Inc. 

2. Kidde Fyrnetics. 


4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 

C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 

D. Cabinet Construction: Non-rated. 

E. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet. 

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. 

F. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit 

style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame 

overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer 

edge (backbend). 

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth. 

G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 

H. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet. 

I. Door Style: Full bubble with frame. 

J. Door Glazing: Molded acrylic bubble. 

1. Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear, transparent. 

K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for 

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 

1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch, manufacturer's standard. 

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to 

open 180 degrees. 

L. Finishes: 

1. Stainless Steel: No. 7 finish. 


A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, 

door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 

2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1- 

mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, 

fire-barrier material. 

a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials 

indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 

10520-3 




1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, 

minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and 

ground smooth. 




B. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. 






2.7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 

A. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 

1. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished 

finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each 

piece. 

B. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7 finish. 

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded 

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 



A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where 

semirecessed cabinets will be installed. 

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. 



A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and 

size of cabinet and trim style. 

10520-4 





A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights 

indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and 

plumb. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 

C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 

D. Non-cabinet Mounted Extinguishers: Where extinguishers are not indicated to be 

mounted in cabinets, provide manufacturer’s standard bracket mounting assembly. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection 

specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. 

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that 

integral locking devices operate properly. 

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces 

as recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to 

factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or 

furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer. 

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 


10520-5 



SECTION 10530 

PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Prefabricated aluminum walkway covers with internal drainage capabilities. 


1. Division 3 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete” for concrete work associated with the 

canopy installation. 

2. Division 4 Section “Unit Masonry Assemblies” for masonry intersections with 

canopies. 

3. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for canopy flashing not provided 

by the canopy manufacturer. 

4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise 

specified in this Section. 


A. General: Provide prefabricated walkway covers that comply with performance 

requirements specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies 

similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide prefabricated walkway covers capable of 

withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within 

limits and under conditions indicated on the structural drawings. 

C. Thermal Movements: Provide prefabricated walkway covers that allow for thermal 


surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of 

components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental 

effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both 

solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 



10530-1 






individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of prefabricated walkway 

covers and associated accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of prefabricated 

walkway covers and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and 

connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other 

information to determine compliance with specified requirements. For installed 

products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed 

and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, registered in the State of Florida, 

responsible for their preparation. Submit design calculations confirming the 

prefabricated walkway covers meet or exceed all structural requirements of the 


C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, professional engineer. 


A. Comply with the Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Latest Edition, ASCE 7-95, 

Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, Latest Edition, American 

Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and the American Society for Testing 

and Materials (ASTM) recommendations for fabrication, construction details and 

installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide prefabricated walkway cover systems capable of 


limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Design Loads: As indicated on the Structural Engineering Drawings. 

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 

C. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of prefabricated walkway 

cover prior to fabrication. 

D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and 

installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project 

and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 

E. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication 

and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, mechanical attachment and field 

assembly of units. Pre-assemble units in ship to greatest extent possible and 

disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for 

re-assembly and coordinated installation. 

F. Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard one (1) year warranty. 

G. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of prefabricated walkway covers through one 


10530-2 




H. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

prefabricated walkway covers are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to 

Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except 

with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive 

explanatory data to Architect for review. 


A. Deliver components, sheets, prefabricated walkway cover components, and other 

manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package prefabricated 

walkway cover components for protection during transportation and handling. 

B. Unload, store, and erect prefabricated walkway covers components in a manner to 

prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. 

C. Stack prefabricated walkway cover components horizontally on platforms or pallets, 

covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store components to 

ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store components in 

contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface 

damage. 

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal prefabricated walkway covers 

components from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary 

for period of prefabricated walkway covers installation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening 

dimensions by field measurements before prefabricated walkway covers fabrication 

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate metal prefabricated walkway covers with structural supports and other 

adjoining work to provide a secure and noncorrosive installation. 





1. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each prefabricated walkway covers 

specified is based on the product specified. Subject to compliance with 

requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by 

another manufacturer. 

10530-3 



2.2 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVER DESIGN 


A. Protective cover shall be all welded extruded aluminum system complete with internal 

drainage. Non-welded systems are not acceptable. 

2.3 PREFABRICATED WALKWAY COVER MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Members: All sections shall be extruded aluminum 6063 alloy, heat treated 

to T-6 temper. 

B. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel or 300 series stainless 

steel. 

C. Protective coating: Aluminum columns embedded in concrete shall be protected by 

clear acrylic. 

D. Grout: Grout shall be 2000 p.s.i. compressive strength, 1 part Portland cement and 3 

parts masonry sand. Add water to produce pouring consistency. 

E. Gaskets: Gaskets shall be dry seal santoprene pressure type. 

F. Aluminum Extrusions: Extruded Aluminum Alloy 6063-T6: 

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on 

Drawings. 

a. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: 




2.4 PREFABRICATED WALKWAY COVER CONSTRUCTION 

A. General: Provide factory-formed internally draining prefabricated walkway covers of 

design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and metal thickness as indicated and as 

required for optimum performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform 

appearance. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete 

assembly. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: as manufactured by Peachtree Protective Covers, Inc., 1477 

Rosedale Drive, Hiram, GA 30141, phone 770-439-2120 or a comparable product. 

a. Exterior Finish: Clear anondized. 

2.5 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVER COMPONENTS 

A. Columns: Columns shall be radius-cornered tubular extrusion of size shown on 

drawings with cutout and internal diverter for drainage where indicated. Circular 

downspout opening in column not acceptable. 

10530-4 




B. Beams: Beams shall be open-top tubular extrusion of size and shape shown on 

drawings, top edges thickened for strength and designed to receive deck members in 

self-flashing manner. Structural ties shall be installed in tops of all beams. 

C. Deck: Deck shall be extruded self-flashing sections interlocking into a composite unit. 

Closures at deck ends shall be welded plates. 

D. Fascia: Fascia shall be manufacturer’s standard shape. Size as indicated on 

drawings. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish prefabricated walkway covers accessories at the factory 

to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as 

necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles 

and with dimensional and structural requirements. 

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free 

from warp and buckle. 

B. Bent Construction: Beams and columns shall be factory welded with neatly mitered 

corners into one-piece rigid bents. All welds shall be smooth and uniform using an 

inert gas shielded arc. Suitable edge preparation shall be performed to assure 100% 

penetration. Grind welds only where interfering with adjoining structure to allow for 

flush connection. Field welding is not permitted. Rigid mechanical joints shall be used 

when shipping limitations prohibit the shipment of fully welded bents. 

C. Deck Construction: Deck shall be manufactured of extruded modules that interlock in a 

self-flashing manner. Interlocking joints shall be positively fastened at 8” O.C. creating 

a monolithic structural unit capable of developing the full strength of the sections. The 

fastenings must have minimum shear strength of 350 pounds each. Deck shall be 

assembled with sufficient camber to offset dead load deflection. 









requirements for installation tolerances, supports, and other conditions affecting 

performance of work. 

10530-5 




1. Examine column sleeves and anchor bolts and other prefabricated walkway 

cover support components to verify that they have been installed within 

alignment tolerances required by prefabricated walkway covers manufacturer. 





A. Erection shall be performed after all concrete, masonry, and roofing work in the vicinity 

is completed and cleaned. 

B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections 

capable of interfering with attachment. 

C. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in 

Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 

3.3 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVER INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Install prefabricated walkway covers in orientation, sizes, and locations 

indicated on Drawings and in full compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Install 

extrusions perpendicular to vertical supports, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor 

prefabricated walkway covers and other components of the work securely in place, with 

provisions for thermal and structural movement. 

1. Field cutting of prefabricated walkway covers components by torch is not 

permitted. 

2. Anchor prefabricated walkway covers to building substructure as indicated. 

3. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the 

manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with their recommendations. 

Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and 

trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assemblies as directed. 

4. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damages or defaced 

members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process 

as directed. 

5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 

6. Install flashing and trim as prefabricated walkway covers work proceeds. 

B. Column Sleeves: Column sleeves (Styrofoam blockouts) or anchor bolts (if required) 

shall be furnished by Canopy manufacturer and installed by the General Contractor. 

C. Erection: Protective cover shall be erected true to line, level and plumb. Aluminum 

columns embedded in concrete shall be protected by clear acrylic. Downspout 

columns shall be filled with grout to the discharge level to prevent standing water. 

Non-draining columns shall have weep holes installed at top of concrete to remove 

condensation. 

10530-6 




3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Erection Tolerances: Variation from level: +/- 1/4” maximum in any column to column 

space or 20’-0” runs, non-cumulative. 


A. Remove and replace applications of prefabricated walkway covers where inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as prefabricated 

walkway covers are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. On completion of prefabricated walkway covers installation, 

clean finished surfaces as recommended by prefabricated walkway covers 

manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

B. Replace prefabricated walkway covers components that have been damaged or have 

deteriorated beyond successful repair. 


10530-7 



SECTION 10700 

EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Custom factory-formed and mechanically assembled, exterior sunshades. 


1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for secondary support framing supporting 

metal sunshades. 

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants not otherwise 

specified in this Section. 


A. General: Provide sunshades that comply with performance requirements specified as 

determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for 

this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide sunshades capable of withstanding the effects of 

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions 

indicated on the structural drawings. 

C. Thermal Movements: Provide sunshades that allow for thermal movements resulting 

from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by 

preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint 

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering 

calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and 

nighttime-sky heat loss. 





individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sunshade and 

associated accessories. 

10700-1 




B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of sunshade and 

accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to 

adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to 

determine compliance with specified requirements. Distinguish between factory- and 

field-assembled work. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of prefabricated 

aluminum canopies and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections 

and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and 

other information to determine compliance with specified requirements. For installed 

products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed 

and sealed by the qualified professional engineer, registered in the State of Florida, 

responsible for their preparation. Submit design calculations confirming the 

prefabricated aluminum canopies meet or exceed all structural requirements of the 


D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 


A. Comply with SMACNA “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” recommendations for 

fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of sunshades prior to 

fabrication. 

C. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication 





D. Structural Performance: Provide prefabricated aluminum canopy systems capable of 


limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State 

of Florida. 

3. Analysis of blade deflection shall be limited to L/120, 3/4 inch, or as required by 

code. 

E. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in erecting and 

installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project 

and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 

F. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication 





10700-2 




G. Warranties: Manufacturer’s standard one (1) year warranty. 

H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of prefabricated exterior sun control device and 

components through one source from a single manufacturer. 

I. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

sunshade are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section 

"Product Requirements." 

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except 

with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive 

explanatory data to Architect for review. 


A. Deliver components, sheets, equipment enclosure panels, and other manufactured 

items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package sunshades for protection during 

transportation and handling. 

B. Unload, store, and erect sunshade components in a manner to prevent bending, 

warping, twisting, and surface damage. 

C. Stack sunshade components horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable 

weathertight and ventilated covering. Store components to ensure dryness, with 

positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store components in contact with other 

materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 

D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal sunshade components from exposure 

to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sunshade 

installation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening 

dimensions by field measurements before sunshade fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate metal sunshades with structural supports and other adjoining work to 

provide a secure and noncorrosive installation. 





10700-3 




1. Basis-of-Design Products: The design for each metal sunshade specified is 

based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other 

manufacturers specified. 

2.2 SUNSHADE MATERIALS 

A. Clip Angles: Structural grade aluminum. 

B. Fastenings: Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Provide types, gauges 

and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. 

C. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts 

for installation and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use stainless steel 

or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in place anchors. Furnish inserts, as 

required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 

D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5: 

1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on 

Drawings. 

a. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: 




2.3 SUNSHADE CONSTRUCTION 

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal sunshades of design, materials, sizes, depth, 

arrangement, and metal thickness as indicated and as required for optimum 

performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. Include 

supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: C/S Sunshade Model 100-3 as manufactured by Construction 

Specialties, Inc., 49 Meeker Avenue, Cranford, NJ 07016; 1-800-631-7379, or a 

comparable product. 

C. All fascia, blades, and outrigger components shall be fabricated from extruded 

aluminum sections in (ASTM B211) 6063-T5 alloy. 

D. Outrigger support tab brackets shall be high strength aluminum. Outriggers shall be 

custom fabricated aluminum flat channel fabricated to the profiles detailed. Outriggers 

to be a minimum of ¼” thick, six inches tall. Double end plates are required at all 

outrigger conditions. Outriggers to be secured to steel “tabs” that are welded to the 

steel support tube. 

E. Blades shall be 6 inch tall, longspan, extruded aluminum and of a box shape as 

detailed. Blades shall be factory assembled to outriggers using stainless steel, type F, 

thread cutting screws through internal slots in blades. Welded construction is not 

acceptable. Blades must be mechanically secured to allow for replacement in case of 

10700-4 




damage. Fasteners to be hex head. Blades to be miter cut and fitted to outrigger 

channels. 

F. No fascia. 

G. Sunshades are to be shipped in corded sections to be fitted to support members by the 

installer. 

a. Exterior Finish: Clear anondized. 


A. General: Fabricate and finish sunshades and accessories at the factory to greatest 

extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary 

to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with 

dimensional and structural requirements. 

1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free 

from warp and buckle. 

2. Provide fixed Sunshades and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, 

arrangement, and thickness as indicated or as required for optimal performance 

with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. 

3. Include supports, anchorage and accessories required for complete assembly. 














requirements for installation tolerances, sunshade supports, and other conditions 

affecting performance of work. 

10700-5 




1. Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that girts, angles, 

channels, studs, and other sunshade support members and anchorage have 

been installed within alignment tolerances required by sunshade manufacturer. 





A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections 

capable of interfering with attachment. 

B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in 

Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 

3.3 SUNSHADE INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. General: Install sunshades in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings 

and in full compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Install extrusions perpendicular 

to vertical supports, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor sunshades and other 

components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural 

movement. 

1. Field cutting of sunscreen components by torch is not permitted. 

2. Anchor sunshade to building substructure as indicated. 

3. Miter sunshade fascia assembly at outside corners as indicated. 

4. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the 

manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with their recommendations. 

Restore finish completely. Remove and replace members where cutting and 

trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assemblies as directed. 

5. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damages or defaced 

members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process 

as directed. 

6. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 

7. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 

8. Install flashing and trim as sunshade work proceeds. 

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive 


coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by 

other permanent separation as recommended by sunshade manufacturer. 

1. Coat back side of sunshade components with bituminous coating or isolation 

tape where wall panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious 

construction. 



10700-6 




3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Erection Tolerances: Variation from level: +/- 1/8” maximum in any column to column 

space or 20’-0” runs, non-cumulative. 

B. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of consecutive members 1/32”. 


A. Remove and replace applications of sunshades where inspections indicate that they do 

not comply with specified requirements. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sunshades are 

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 

On completion of sunshade installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by 

sunshade manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

B. Replace sunshade components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair. 


10700-7 



SECTION 10801 

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Toilet and bath accessories. 

2. Underlavatory guards. 


1. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories. 


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory 

unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by 

Architect. 

1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by 

Architect, may be provided. 


A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances 

required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, 

cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to 

prevent delaying the Work. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one 

of the following: 

1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: 

10801-1 




a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 

b. American Specialties, Inc. 

c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 

d. Bradley Corporation. 

2. Underlavatory Guards: 

a. Brocar Products, Inc. 

b. Truebro, Inc. 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products 

indicated for each designation in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule on the 

drawings. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8- 

mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), 

rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings. 

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9- 

mm) minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as 

required for applied finish. 

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). 

E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), 

nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. 

F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with 

silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with 

FS DD-M-411. 

G. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication. 

H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, 

tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 


A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped 

manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of 

accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each 

accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating 

manufacturer's name and product model number. 

B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On 

interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide 

10801-2 




printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and 

product model number. 

C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with 

tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with 

continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. 

D. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded 

construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, 

stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. 

E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and 

resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 



A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners 

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install 

units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, 

toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, 

according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. 

C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested 

according to method in ASTM F 446. 


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms 

function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. 

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 

3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE – REFER TO DRAWINGS 


10801-3 



SECTION 11451 

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Cooking equipment. 

2. Refrigerator/freezers. 

3. Icemakers. 

4. Dishwashers. 



B. Maintenance data. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer 

for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, 

and marked for intended use. 

C. Residential Appliances: Comply with NAECA standards. 

D. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR 

product labeling program. 

1.4 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each 

appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components 

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Electric Range: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner 

elements. 

2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the 

sealed refrigeration system. 

3. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub 

and door liner. 

11451-1 








1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each residential appliance is based on 

the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the 

named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers 

specified. 

2.2 COOKING APPLIANCES 

A. Built-in Microwave Oven: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: KitchenAid Model KBMS1454SSS or a comparable 

product. 

2. Type: Built-in. 

3. Finish – Stainless steel. 

2.3 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES 

A. Refrigerator/Freezer: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: KitchenAid Model KBFS20ETSS or a comparable 

product. 

2. Type: Freestanding, French door top, pull out bottom freezer. 

3. Storage capacity: 19.7 Cu.Ft. 

4. Front Panel: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel. 

B. Icemaker IC: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: KitchenAid Model KUIC18NNTS or a comparable 

product. 

2. Type: Under the counter. 

3. Front Panel: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel. 

2.4 CLEANING APPLIANCES 

A. Dishwasher DW: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: KitchenAid Model KUDS03STSS or a comparable 

product. 

11451-2 




2. Type: Under the counter, 24 inches wide. 

3. Front Panel: Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel. 



A. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with 

concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and 

rough openings are completely concealed. 

B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been 

completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate 

equipment. 

C. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 


11451-3 



SECTION 12491 

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following types of venetian blinds and accessories: 

1. Miniblinds with aluminum louver slats. 


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for 

mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 


A. Miniblind: Venetian blind with nominal 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide louver slat. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material 

descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, 

features, finishes, and operating instructions. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of horizontal 

louver blind indicated. 

C. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 

Include the following: 

1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes. 

2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to 

finishes and performance. 

3. Operating hardware. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

12491-1 




B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-testresponse 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test 

method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction: 

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 

2. 

C. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds 

complying with WCMA A 100.1. 


A. Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and 

location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a 

window treatment schedule. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and 

wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient 

temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project 

when occupied for its intended use. 

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other 

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for 

operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. 

Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction 

progress to avoid delaying the Work. 






1. Horizontal Louver Blinds, Aluminum Louver Slats: 

a. Comfortex Window Fashions. 

b. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. 

c. Levolor Contract; a Newell Company; Levolor. 

d. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Bali. 

e. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber. 

f. Verosol USA, Inc. 

B. Louver Slats: Aluminum, alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use 

and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners. 

12491-2 




1. Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch (25 mm) for miniblinds. 

2. Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm). 

3. Slat Finish: One color as indicated. 

a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully 

enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends; capacity for one blind per 

headrail. 

1. Finish Color Characteristics: Color texture, pattern, and gloss differing from 

louver slats as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, sealed with plastic or metal 

capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of louver slat bottom contoured 

for minimizing light gaps; with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent 

their contact with sill. 

E. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable 

wand preventing overrotation, and linkage rod, for the following operation: 

1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand. 

2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind. 

3. Tilt: Full. 

F. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in 

ascending or descending travel. 

G. Mounting: Ceiling mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without 

damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for 

blind placement and alignment indicated. 

1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing 

recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS FABRICATION 

A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless 

otherwise indicated, for each horizontal louver blind designed to be self-leveling and 

consisting of louver slats, rails, ladders, tapes, lifting and tilting mechanisms, cord, cord 

lock, tilt control, and installation hardware. 

B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 

1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 

C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as 

follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 

1. Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per 

side or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than jamb-tojamb 

dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 

12491-3 




1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than head-to-sill dimension 

of opening in which each blind is installed. 

D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for 

supporting headrail and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind 

mounting method indicated. 

E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal 

noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing 

to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of 

normal use. 

F. Color-Coated Finish: 

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked 

finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation 

including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 




requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions 

affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions 

have been corrected. 

3.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION 

A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to 

manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior louver edges in any position 

are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support 

as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds 

and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any. 

B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from 

binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 


A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to 

manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

12491-4 




C. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, 

before time of Substantial Completion. 


12491-5 



SECTION 15400 

PLUMBING 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Requirements, 

Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, are hereby made a part of this 

Section as if fully repeated herein. 

B. Scope of Work: Work included under this section of the specifications shall include 

complete plumbing systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 

1. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for underground piping 

and plumbing. 

2. Soil, waste and vent piping. 

3. Domestic hot and cold water piping. 

4. Fixtures. 

5. Water coolers. 

6. Water heaters and water heater drain pans. 

7. Fittings, hangers, valves, sleeves, escutcheons, etc. 

8. Lead flashing. 

9. Insulation. 

10. Controls. 

11. Disinfection of potable water piping. 

C. Related Work: The following work is specified in other sections of these specifications. 

1. Power wiring: Electrical - 16000. 

D. Point of Connection: Underground water and sanitary piping shall commence where 

shown on the drawings. 

E. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the Architect to 

determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the drawings or 

specifications. The Contractor shall bring up for discussion and decision any questions 

concerning the project. No work shall be performed prior to this meeting. The 

Architect shall set the date, time, and place of conference. 

1.2 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS 

A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this contract including Florida Building 

Code 2007, Florida Building Code 2007 – Mechanical and Florida Building Code 2007 

– Plumbing. Obtain information on all code restrictions and requirements. In case of 

conflict between the contract documents and a governing code or ordinance, such 

conflict shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution. 

Extra payment will not be allowed for Work required by code restrictions except 

through written agreement with the Owner. 

15400-1 


CITY OF LABELLE MEMBRANE WTF 04-07-11

PLUMBING 

B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final 

payment is contingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect. 

C. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' 

Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to 

the Architect upon request. 

1.3 SITE INSPECTION 

A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before submitting 

bid. Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and 

workspace limitations. 

1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 

A. Refer to the general construction drawings which are bound with the drawings of this 

Work for construction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and structural drawings 

shall take precedence over plumbing drawings. It is the intent of the plumbing 

drawings to show the general arrangement of the system and not to indicate all offsets, 

fittings and accessories which may be required, nor to show exact locations of piping, 

fixtures or equipment except where actual dimensions are given. All vertical piping 

shall be located in walls in finished spaces unless otherwise noted. 

B. Specifications and drawings shall be considered as supplementary to each other, 

requiring materials and labor indicated, specified, or implied by either specifications or 

drawings. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications to call for finished Work, 

tested, and ready for operation, and in complete conformance with all applicable 

codes, rules and regulations. Minor details not usually shown nor specified, but 

manifestly necessary for the proper installation and operation of the various systems, 

shall be included in the Work and in the bid proposal, the same as if specified or shown 

on the drawings. 

C. If any departures from the drawings and specifications are deemed necessary, details 

of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect for 

approval. No departures shall be made without prior approval of the Architect. 

1.5 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 

A. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture 

or type of construction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be 

interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting 

competition. Equal products may be submitted for approval to be used subject to 

compliance with requirements set forth in the General Requirements, Division 1, and, if 

applicable, in the Instructions to Bidders. 

1.6 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the drawings or in 

specifications in reference to his required service or product, and no qualifications or 

specification of such is included, then the material gauges, details of manufacturer, 

15400-2 



PLUMBING 

finish, etc., shall be in accordance with his standard practice, directions or 

specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for any infringement of patents, 

royalties or copyrights which may be incurred thereby. 

B. Equipment scheduled on the drawings was used to arrive at space, maintenance, and 

utility service. If other equipment is submitted and approved, take responsibility for 

maintaining these space, maintenance, and utility service requirements and cost for 

any resulting changes including cost to change electrical service required by 

substituted equipment. 

C. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As far as is 

practical, similar products shall be by one manufacturer. 


A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Requirements, Division 1. 

B. Samples of any plumbing equipment or materials shall be submitted if requested by 

the Architect. If a sample is requested, have the sample delivered to the Architect or 

arrange for the Architect to examine it elsewhere. Failure to comply may be cause for 

rejection. 

C. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for the Architect's approval before purchasing or 

installing the following: 

1. Piping (where revised from the drawings). 

2. Fixtures. 

3. Water coolers. 

4. Water heaters and water heater drain pans. 

5. Valves and appurtenances. 

6. Pipe hangers. 


8. Floor drains and trap primers. 

9. Controls. 

10. Thermostatic mixing valves. 

1.8 PERFORMANCE DATA 

A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance of 

equipment as installed. Make suitable allowances if installation details are such that 

actual operating conditions unfavorably affect performance as compared to conditions 

under which the equipment was rated. 

1.9 CATALOG, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Provide four (4) complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured 

item of fixtures and equipment used in the Plumbing Work. In addition to the catalog 

data, installation, operating and maintenance data and bill of materials for all operating 

equipment shall be submitted. Each of the four sets of data shall be bound in loose 

15400-3 



PLUMBING 

leaf binders and submitted to the Architect before final payment is made. A complete 

double index shall be provided as follows: 

1. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 

2. Listing the names of manufacturers alphabetically by name together with their 

addresses and the names and addresses of local sales representatives. 

B. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the Owner 

with complete instructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication and periodic 

maintenance, together with the source of replacement parts and service, for the items 

of equipment covered. 

1.10 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION 

A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish, set and wire all controls, disconnect devices, 

and starters as required for all equipment except for those items furnished with integral 

controls, disconnect devices, and/or starters. 

B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring requirements 

for all plumbing equipment actually purchased as soon as practical. This shall include 

all diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Contractor to make 

connections properly. If equipment actually purchased requires larger electrical service 

than equipment scheduled, arrange and pay for required electrical service change. 

C. Coordinate location of equipment and piping with Electrical*, Fire Protection,* and 

HVAC Contractors to maintain clearance for equipment maintenance, avoid 

interference with duct and HVAC piping runs, and to prevent piping from being installed 

over electrical panels. If interference develops, the Architect will decide which 

equipment, conduit, duct, piping, etc., must be relocated regardless of installation 

order. Take responsibility for relocating Plumbing work, if so ordered, including all 

associated costs. 

D. Within 30 days following award of the contract, report to the Architect in writing, all real 

or potential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Plumbing Work or between the 

trades and obtain an agreement with the Architect on a solution. Those reported after 

30 days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be resolved at the 

discretion of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting from the progress of Work to the 

Architect immediately or accept the expense for corrective work caused by failure to 

report such a conflict. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval 

of the Architect. Changes in design means any change which will affect the capacity, 

reliability, operation or safety of the systems or any parts thereof, including changes 

which may be required to conform to local regulations or codes. 

1.11 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY 

A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 1, and 

repair any defects becoming apparent within the warranty period as directed by the 

Architect. 

15400-4 



PLUMBING 


A. Protect all materials and equipment against damage and vandalism during 

construction. Replace any damaged material or equipment and place the systems in 

perfect working condition. 


2.1 FIXTURES 

A. Fixtures including faucets, valves, drains, and trim, shall be as scheduled on drawings. 

Approved manufacturers are Acorn, American Standard, Bradley, Elkay, Fiat, Just, 

Kohler, Symmons and T & S. 

B. Flush valves shall be Sloan or Zurn. 

2.2 WATER COOLERS 

A. Water coolers shall be as scheduled on drawings. Approved manufacturers are Elkay 

or Halsey Taylor. 

2.3 WATER HEATERS AND DRAIN PANS 

A. Water heaters shall be as scheduled on drawings. Approved manufacturers are A.O. 

Smith, State, Lochinvar, Rheem, Bradford White. 

B. Drain pans for electric water heaters shall be minimum 2" deep with molded and 

sealed corners and shall be fabricated from 24 gauge (0.0276") galvanized steel or 

high impact plastic with minimum thickness 0.0625". 

2.4 PIPE 

A. Soil, waste and vent piping above grade shall be one of the following with exposed 

sanitary piping under lavatories chrome plated copper/brass: 

1. Solid wall DWV polyvinyl chloride (PVC), schedule 40, solvent weld joints. 

Exposed sanitary piping under lavatories shall be chrome plated copper/brass. 

(Note: Piping located in supply or return air plenums shall be insulated if PVC is 

used. Coordinate with Mechanical Contractor for locations of air plenums. See 

insulation section of this Specification for thickness and type. 

2. Spun service weight cast-iron, hub and spigot pattern joints made with white 

oakum and pure lead or joints made with elastomeric compression gasket. All 

cast iron pipe and fittings shall be made in the United States, marked with the 

collective trademark of Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF 

International. 

3. Spun service weight cast-iron, no hub, joints made with stainless steel clamps 

and neoprene gaskets. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall be made in the United 

15400-5 



PLUMBING 

States, marked with the collective trademark of Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

(CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. 

4. Copper DWV, solder joints. 

B. Soil, waste and vent piping below grade shall be solid wall DWV polyvinyl chloride 

(PVC), schedule 40, solvent weld joints. 

C. Hot and cold water supply piping above and below grade shall be chlorinated polyvinyl 

chloride (CPVC), solvent weld joints, suitable for use at minimum working pressure of 

160 PSI at 73 deg. F. and 100 PSI at 180 deg. F. Pipes 1/2" thru 2" shall be CPVC-CT 

(copper pipe size) meeting test requirements of SDR 11. Pipes larger than 2" shall be 

CPVC Schedule 80 with Schedule 80 fittings. 

2.5 DIELECTRIC UNIONS 

A. Use dielectric unions when joining dissimilar metals. 

2.6 FLOOR DRAINS AND TRAP PRIMERS 

A. Floor drains shall be as scheduled on drawings and shall have perforated or slotted 

strainers, outlets same size as waste pipe to which connected, cast-iron body with 

inside caulk connection, and deep seal trap. Strainers shall be minimum size required 

for sanitary pipe size indicated. Provide ductile iron grates for heavy traffic areas. 

Approved manufacturers are Ancon, Josam, Smith, Wade, Zurn. 

B. Trap primers shall be as scheduled on drawings. Pressure drop activated trap primers 

shall be Mifab model MR-500 with model MI-DU distribution unit (where required). 

2.7 INTERIOR HOSE BIBS AND FREEZELESS EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANTS 

A. Interior hose bibs shall be angle type, all brass 3/4" inlet, with flange for wall mounting 

and vacuum breaker, and box with locking cover for recessed installation in wall or 

floor. 

B. Freezeless wall hydrant shall have 3/4" hose nozzle, loose operating key, compression 

type valve seat, vacuum breaker, and box for recessed installation in wall or floor. 

2.8 SHOCK ABSORBERS 

A. Shock absorbers shall be bellows or piston type water hammer arrestors. Closed end, 

vertical standpipe air chambers will not be accepted. Water hammer arrestors shall be 

sized and installed in accordance with PDI standards and the manufacturers 

specifications. Access shall be provided to water hammer arrestors. 

2.9 CLEANOUTS 

A. Floor cleanouts shall be cast-iron with adjustable housing, ferrule with plug, with round 

secured nickel brass scoriated top for finished concrete floors (including those covered 

15400-6 



PLUMBING 

by carpeting) and round secured nickel brass recessed top for vinyl tile floors and 

carpeted floors. Ductile iron tops for heavy traffic areas. 

B. Wall cleanouts shall be screw type with chromium plated bronze or stainless steel 

access cover plates designed to be installed outside wall finish material. 

2.10 VALVES 

A. Valves offered under these specifications shall be limited to the products of a type 

regularly produced for the service and capacities specified. Ratings shall be in 

accordance with the manufacturer's latest literature available. Valves shall be line size 

unless specifically shown otherwise. All equipment service valves and all shut-off 

valves 2" and smaller shall be bronze body full port ball valves with stainless steel ball 

and nylon seat. 

B. Gate valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged ends, Class 125, iron body, bronze 

mounted, bolted bonnet, rising stem, OS & Y, solid wedge. 2" and smaller shall be 

either threaded end or solder end, Class 125, bronze body, solid wedge; union bonnet 

and rising stem for threaded end valve, and screwed bonnet, non-rising stem for solder 

end valves. 

C. Check valves shall be vertical lift check with bronze disc for vertically mounted valves 

and swing check, horizontal swing bronze disc with screw cap for horizontally mounted 

valves. 

D. Throttling valves shall generally be globe pattern, unless otherwise shown on 

drawings. 

E. Drain valves for all lines shall be 1/2" size, 200 pound, bronze globe valves with 

threaded ends and hose thread adapter nipple. 

F. Approved manufacturers are Apollo, Brass Craft, Capital, Chicago Faucet, Crane, 

Delany, Delta, Dunham Bush, Jamesbury, Milwaukee, Nibco, Sloan, Speakman, 

Stockham, T & S, Walworth, Watts, Zurn. 

2.11 PIPE HANGERS 

A. Hangers and supports specified by "Type" herein shall be designed and manufactured 

in accordance with the Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings 

Industry (MSS) Publication SP-58 and shall be selected and applied in accordance with 

the Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 

Publication SP-69. 

B. Pipe hangers shall be galvanized steel hangers selected within the manufacturer's 

published load ratings and shall be Auto-Grip, Fee and Mason, or Grinnel. Pipe 2-1/2 

inches and smaller shall be MSS Type 7, 10. Pipe 3 inches and larger shall be MSS 

Type 1, 260. 

C. Hanger rods shall be galvanized steel threaded both ends or continuous thread, sized 

with safety factor of five (5). Approved: Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146. Rods for trapeze 

hangers supporting several pipes shall be sized for the total piping load. 

15400-7 



PLUMBING 

D. Hangers for copper pipe shall be either copper-plated type or pipe contact area shall 

be plastic coated to prevent direct contact between the pipe and hanger. 

E. Supports for insulated pipes shall have insulation shields MSS Type 40. 

F. Beam clamps shall be MSS Type 29. 

G. Inserts: 

1. Preset Type: Malleable iron with removable interchangeable nuts having lateral 

adjustment of not less than one and five-eights inch. Continuous inserts shall 

have a capacity of 2000 Ib. per foot and shall be hooked over reinforcing. 

Approved: C-B Universal Fig. 282; Unistrut Products Co., P-300; Brinkley B32-1. 

2. After Set Type: Self-drilling style expansion shells shall be used in concrete and 

brick. Toggle bolts shall be used on block walls and partitions. Approved: Phillips 

Drill Co. "Red Head"; Raul"Saber Tooth" and "Spring Wings". 

3. Power Actuated After Set Features: Pin and stud anchors shall have a 

withdrawal resistance four times the indicated load. Approved: Hilti Fastening 

Systems, Hilti, Inc.; Ramset Fastening Systems, Olin Corp. 

H. Use vibration isolators in hanger rods to isolate vibration in piping subject to vibration, 

or where shown on drawings. 

2.12 SECONDARY PIPE POSITIONING AND SUPPORTS: 

A. Makeshift, field devised methods of plumbing pipe support, such as with the use of 

scrap framing materials, are not allowed. Support and positioning of piping shall be by 

means of engineered methods that comply with IAPMO PS 42-96. These shall be 

Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE support systems or Owner-approved equivalent. 

B. For plenum applications use pipe supports that meet ASTM E-84 25/50 standards, 

such as the Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Flame Fighter TM or Owner-approved 

equivalent. 

C. For vertical mid-span supports of piping 4” and under, use Hubbard 

Enterprises/HOLDRITE Stout Brackets with Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE Stout 

Clamps or two-hole pipe clamps (MSS Type 26). 

2.13 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 

A. Sleeves shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or pre-formed plastic. Sleeves shall be 

sized to allow approximately 1/8" gap around the pipe or its insulation. 

B. Sleeves through floor slabs or fire walls shall be galvanized steel pipe of proper size. 

Sleeves through floor slabs shall extend 1/2" above the finished floor. 

C. Sleeves penetrating fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings shall be filled with fire-rated 

material capable of maintaining the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor or ceiling. 

D. Escutcheon plates for finished spaces shall be nickel-plated. 

15400-8 



PLUMBING 

2.14 EQUIPMENT, VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION 

A. All identification legends, arrows and color bands shall be stenciled on pressuresensitive 

labeling material approved by the Architect. Labeling material colors for use 

on piping shall be as specified in ANSI A 13.1 latest revision. 

B. Valve tags shall be plastic, aluminum or brass at least 1" in diameter and stamped with 

contrasting colored figures as large as possible. 

C. Pipe markers shall be Seton style RPM or approved equal. 

2.15 INSULATION 

A. Piping insulation shall be pre-formed, flame-retardant, elastomeric, polyethylene, pipe 

insulation similar to AP Armaflex, AP Armaflex SS, IMCOA Imolock or NOMACO 

Nomalock, and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Pre-formed 

Owens-Corning 3.5 pound density fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket and 

self-sealing lap will be approved for pipe installed in dry locations. Insulation 

thicknesses shall be as follows: 

1. Cold water: 1/2" thick. 

2. Hot water: 1" thick. 

3. All PVC piping located in supply or return air plenums: 1/2" thick. Insulation shall 

meet all state and local code requirements for plenum use. 

B. At all exposed piping under handicapped lavatories in rest rooms, provide pre molded 

vinyl Insulation. Insulation shall be "Handi Lav-guard" insulation kits as manufactured 

by Truebro Inc. or approved equal. Truebro Inc. phone no. is (203) 875-2868. 

C. All insulation materials and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed 

ratings per NFPA Bulletin 90-A when tested in accordance with ASTM Standard E 84 

and shall meet local requirements for use in return air plenums. Smoke developed less 

than or equal to 50, and flame spread less than or equal to 25. All coatings and 

mastics shall be nonflammable in wet state. 

2.16 LEAD FLASHING 

A. Lead flashing shall be sheet lead weighing 4 pounds per square foot for all pipe 

flashing through roof. 

2.17 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 

A. Equipment supports shall be sized and designed to support the equipment and shall 

be hot-dip galvanized steel. 

2.18 STRAINERS 

A. Strainers shall be self-cleaning and of same size as pipe lines in which they are 

installed and shall be Webster, Sarco, Dunham, Hoffman, Illinois, or approved equal, Y 

15400-9 



PLUMBING 

type with 125 pound iron body, screwed connections to 2" in size and flanged ends for 

larger sizes. 

B. Screens for water strainers shall be perforated Monel cylinders with 3/64" perforations. 

C. Water strainer 2" and larger shall have a 3/4" valved blow-down connection extended 

full size to discharge over the nearest accessible floor drain. 

2.19 MOTORS 

A. Full Load Motor Efficiencies: All motors installed in equipment specified in these 

specifications shall be classified under the National Electric Manufacturers 

Association's Standard as "energy efficient" or shall otherwise meet the requirements 

of the Florida Energy Code. 

B. Except where otherwise specified, all motors shall be designed for continuous service 

and for regular starting on full-line voltage with normal starting current. The limits on 

service factor and temperature rise above 40 deg. C. ambient at rated load shall be as 

follows: 

1. Motor Enclosure Service Factor Temperature Rise 

2. Drip-Proof 115% 40 deg. C. 

3. Totally Enclosed None 55 deg. C. 

C. The insulation portion of the motor leads between the lug and motor frame shall be at 

least 5" in length when four or less motor leads are used and at least 8" in length when 

more than four motor leads are used. When terminal type lugs are supplied, they shall 

be solderless, Burndy "Hy-Dent" type or approved equal. 

D. Motors shall be furnished for operation as specified or as noted on drawings. All 

motors shall conform to IEEE, NEMA and ANSI standards and shall be General 

Electric, Westinghouse, Louis Allis. 

E. Motors furnished for indoor installation shall be of the open, drip-proof design. Motors 

furnished for installation in wet locations or outdoors shall be of the totally-enclosed 

design. Motors furnished for installation in hazardous locations shall be of the 

explosion-proof design. 

2.20 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Access doors shall be as similar to those manufactured by Milcor Division of Inland- 

Ryerson of type as follows: 

B. Door Location Door Type 

C. Drywall Style "DW" 

D. Masonry or Tile Style "M-Stainless" 

E. Acoustical Tile Style "AT" 

15400-10 



PLUMBING 

F. Plaster Style "K" 

G. Fire Rated Walls/Ceilings Style "Fire Rated" 

H. Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches and, 

other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door sizes shall be 

applicable to access required for normal service. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 

A. Examine the site and all drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of 

the Work. Locate all vertical piping within walls in finished spaces unless specifically 

noted otherwise. Such piping cannot always be shown within walls on drawings due to 

their small scale. 

B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to suit 

actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all Work will be 

installed in proper relationship and coordinate precise location of parts with the Work of 

others. 

C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor including 

locations of required pipe sleeves through walls and foundations. Assume liability for 

cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make proper arrangements in this 

respect. 

D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a given 

manufacture. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of piping, ducts, etc. to 

connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment 

manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and 

connection of all equipment. In case of conflict between manufacturer's instructions 

and the contract documents, notify the Architect before proceeding. No equipment 

installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's 

warranty. 

E. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen thoroughly 

qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will be rejected. 

3.2 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND PUMPING 

A. Excavate, back-fill and compact all trenches required for underground plumbing work. 

Maintain trenches free of water until installation is complete and provide all necessary 

shoring. 

B. Contractor shall field verify all existing underground utilities and avoid damage to 

same. Where existing utilities are damaged, the contractor shall be responsible for all 

repairs or replacement. 

15400-11 



PLUMBING 

C. Excavate trenches suitable in width to provide a minimum of 6" clear space between 

the barrel of the pipe and the trench wall on both sides of the pipe. Accurately grade 

the trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe 

on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Take care not to excavate 

below the depth necessary and excavate bell holes to ensure proper bedding. Backfill 

over-depths with loose, granular, moist material and thoroughly compact to the depth 

required. 

D. Place and compact backfill material in 6" layers until the pipe has a minimum cover of 

12". Place and compact the remaining material in 12" layers. Grade the surface to a 

reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding in neat condition as approved by the 

Architect. 

E. Backfill all trenches passing under foundations with concrete to the underside of the 

foundation and at a 2:1 slope away from each side of the foundation. Backfill all 

trenches that are parallel and deeper than foundations with concrete to a point that will 

place the top of the concrete on a 2:1 slope away from the foundation bottom. Do not 

backfill trenches until all required tests and inspections are completed. 

3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION – GENERAL 

A. Install all piping in a workmanlike manner, according to the best practice of the trade, 

properly pitched and vented to eliminate air pockets or traps, and to ensure rapid and 

noiseless circulation throughout the entire system. Run all piping parallel with or at 

right angles to building walls and partitions. Run all vertical piping within walls in 

finished spaces unless noted otherwise. 

B. Install all piping so as not to interfere with any electric lighting outlets, ductwork, other 

piping, or equipment. Do not install piping in front of any door or window and avoid 

interference with any such openings. Do not install any piping over any motors, 

transformers, electrical panels, or other electrical equipment. 

C. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and install without 

springing or forcing. Cut piping square and remove all burrs and fins before 

assembling. Use standard fittings for all reductions in size and changes in direction. 

Mitering of pipe to form elbows or reducers will not be permitted. Thoroughly clean all 

piping before installation and make sure the piping is free of all foreign material after 

installation. 

D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, 

fittings and valves. Carefully investigate all conditions affecting the Work to avoid 

interferences between pipes, ducts, valves, conduits, electrical fixtures and equipment 

and install as conditions may dictate as part of this contract. 

E. Install all piping in cabinets and vanities as tight to the rear of the cabinet or vanity as 

possible to provide full utilization of the cabinet or vanity for storage. 

3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION 

A. Sanitary Piping: Locate and size sanitary piping within the building where not shown 

on the drawings in accordance with applicable plumbing code. Flash all vents passing 

15400-12 



PLUMBING 

through roof with sheet lead flashing extending a minimum of 6" out around base and a 

minimum of 6" up the stack into a cast-iron flashing collar. Support all soil and vent 

stacks at the base by means of piers or heavy hangers close to the bottom of the riser 

and at each floor by means of heavy iron clamps. Pitch all 2 1/2" and smaller drain 

piping at least 1/4" per foot and 3" and larger drain piping at least 1/8" per foot unless 

otherwise noted. 

B. Fixtures, Floor Drains and Cleanouts: Provide all fixtures and floor drains with traps to 

comply with local regulations and as hereinafter specified. Provide exposed traps with 

brass cleanout plugs. Provide floor drains with trap primers connected as shown on 

drawings. Provide cleanouts in soil and waste lines as shown on the plans and as 

required by the governing codes. Extend cleanouts for piping concealed in floor or 

ceiling construction through the floor above and provide with adjustable floor level 

cleanout set flush with the finished floor. Use wall cleanouts for piping concealed in 

wall construction. 

C. Water Supply Piping: 

1. Provide a complete system of hot and cold water piping extending from water 

supply to each fixture and item of equipment requiring water as indicated on 

drawings. 

2. Install all water piping systems in such a manner that systems can be drained or 

vented completely by providing vents and drain valves at all high and low points. 

3. Install valves at take-off from the main and upstream of all equipment 

connections and elsewhere as indicated on drawings or as required. Provide 

shock absorbers in accordance with PDI selection standards. Make final 

connection to the plumbing fixtures as specified with the plumbing fixture. 

Provide a union in the connection to each threaded valve, fixture or piece of 

apparatus so that it may be readily removed. Install unions downstream of shutoff 

valves. 

3.5 PIPE ASSEMBLY 

A. Sweat Joints in Copper Pipe: Cut pipe squarely to accurate length for full penetration 

into fittings. Remove burrs from ends, clean soldering surface thoroughly, flux, 

assemble and solder before surfaces oxidize. Use approved non-corrosive flux and 

95-5 lead free solder. Use sufficient heat for complete penetration of solder and wipe 

away excess flux and solder. 

B. Sewer Pipe: Start laying pipe so that spigot end is pointed in direction of flow. Lay all 

pipe with ends abutting and true to line and slope. Fit and match all pipe sections to 

form a sewer with a smooth and uniform invert. Clean sockets before joining pipes and 

form all joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Lead and Oakum Joints: Caulk with tarred spun oakum and fill with molten lead to a 

minimum depth of 1" at one pouring, then caulk solidly. Prefabricated joints such as 

"Dual Tite" or approved equal may be used for underground lines only. 

D. Elastomeric Compression Gasket Joints: Install elastomeric compression gasket joints 

in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

15400-13 



PLUMBING 

E. Solvent Weld Joints in PVC and CPVC Pipe: Cut pipe squarely to accurate length for 

full penetration into fittings. Remove burrs from ends, solvent clean joining surfaces 

thoroughly and form all joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's 


F. No-Hub Joints: Cut pipe squarely to accurate length for full penetration into fittings. 

Remove burrs from ends, clean joining surfaces thoroughly and form all joints in 

accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 

G. Threaded Joints in Steel Pipe: Cut pipe to accurate length, ream the ends, and remove 

burrs. Use clean, sharp dies. Imperfectly formed or torn threads will be rejected. Use 

approved dope on male threads only and clean away excess dope. 

H. Joints in Acid Resistant Pipe: Make all joints per pipe manufacturer's instructions. 

3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install all valves with the stems or spindle above the horizontal where possible and 

exercise utmost care not to install valves over electrical equipment. Provide extended 

valve stems on insulated pipe. 

B. Locate valves at all automatic valves, check valves, at all equipment so they can be 

isolated for repairs, at all branch lines connecting mains, and elsewhere as shown on 

drawings. 

C. Locate check valves on the discharge side of all pumps and elsewhere as shown on 

drawings. 

3.7 PIPE HANGER INSTALLATION 

A. Space hangers for horizontal pipe as follows: 

Cast iron soil pipe 5' lengths 5' on center maximum 

10' lengths 10' " " “ 

Threaded pipe 1/2" to 1-1/4" 6' on center maximum 

1-1/2" to 3" 8' " " “ 

4" and larger 10' " " “ 

Plastic pipe 1/2" to 1" 3' on center maximum 

1-1/4" and larger 4' " " “ 

Glass pipe 1/2" to 4" 8' on center maximum 

6" and larger 10' " " “ 

Copper pipe 1-1/4" and smaller 6' on center maximum 

1-1/2" and larger 10' " " “ 

B. Attach hanger rods to sufficiently rigid structural building members. If hangers must be 

attached to either the top chord or bottom chord of steel bar joist, attach the rods by 

clamp at the panel points. Do not under any circumstances burn or drill holes in either 

chord. Do not weld either chord. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices 

necessary for proper support of piping at corners, tops of risers, etc. Provide 

galvanized steel shields over pipe insulation at pipe supports. 

15400-14 



PLUMBING 

C. Support of pipe tubing and equipment shall be accomplished though means of 

engineered products specific to each application. Makeshift field devised methods shall 

not be allowed. 

3.8 SLEEVE AND ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION 

A. Accurately locate and set required sleeves in walls, foundations, floors, etc. Where 

more than one pipe is necessarily passed through a single sleeve as to a unit piping 

enclosure or other conditions resulting in larger than 1/8" gap within the sleeve, tightly 

pack space with proper material to form a barrier against sound, vermin, fire, etc. 

B. Provide escutcheons on all finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, 

pass through floors, walls or ceilings, except in boiler, utility or equipment rooms. 

Fasten escutcheons securely to pipe or pipe covering. 

3.9 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS 

A. Fill all spaces around piping and spaces between piping and sleeves passing through 

fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings with material capable of maintaining the fireresistance 

rating of the wall, floor or ceiling. Use Metacaulk 950GW-1 or approved 

equal caulking material for PVC and CPVC piping. 

B. Recessed fixture penetrations (ie. washer supply boxes, refrigerator supply boxes, 

etc.) of 1-hour rated firewalls shall be installed such that the required fire resistance will 

not be reduced. See architectural dwg's for penetration details. 


A. Provide access doors at circulation pumps, valves, trap primers, air vents, shock 

absorbers, and like items requiring adjustment or maintenance accessibility if they 

cannot be located over lay-in type ceilings or cannot be accessible from attics or 

mechanical rooms. Obtain approval from Architect for location of access doors. 

Provide visible markers for access doors in concealed locations. 

B. Provide visible markers on finished side of lay-in type ceilings to indicate locations of 

valves, air vents, and like items. See Architect for marker type. 

3.11 INSULATION 

A. Use application details in accordance with the insulating material supplier's 

recommendations except where a higher standard is specified herein. 

B. Run covering for piping unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. Use details 

for covering cold surfaces such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier is 

provided. Use these same covering and hanging details for pipes connecting to 

vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressure to avoid metal-to-metal contact 

between pipes and hangers. 

15400-15 



PLUMBING 

C. Provide an insert, not less than 6" long, of the same thickness and contour as 

adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on 

piping 2" or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Use heavy 

density insulating materials suitable for the specified temperature range and strong 

enough to prevent crushing. 

D. Cover surfaces of valves, fittings, strainers, and specialties with built-up insulation 

around irregular shapes to form smooth cylindrical surfaces. Cover such specialties in 

"cold" systems with special care to maintain continuous vapor barrier. Cover flanges 

and ground joint unions in "cold" systems. 

E. Insulate all above grade domestic cold and hot water piping including piping run above 

ceilings, in attics, in crawl space and concealed inside walls. 

3.12 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS INSTALLATION 

A. Furnish, fabricate, and erect all structural supports and platforms as required for all 

equipment installed in this Work, unless otherwise specified. Make these supports and 

platforms independent of all other equipment supports and suspend them from the 

building structural steel, roof purlins, inserts imbedded in concrete slabs, or support 

them on columns as required by the drawings. Attachments to steel bar joists must be 

approved by the Architect and must only be at panel points. Do not, under any 

circumstances, burn, drill or weld either chord of steel bar joist. 

B. Prepare and furnish drawing and templates indicating all concrete Work required for 

equipment furnished under this Work. All concrete required will be provided by the 

General Contractor. Provide, at the time concrete foundations, bases, or curbs are 

formed, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the various equipment in this Work. 

Grout all spaces between the equipment base and concrete supports. 

3.13 STRAINERS 

A. Locate strainers ahead of each automatic control valve, suction side of each pump and 

elsewhere as shown on drawings. 

3.14 CONTROLS 

A. Provide all pressure controls, tempering valves, aquastats, temperature and pressure 

relief valves and control valves necessary for the operation or adjustment of equipment 

and not supplied as part of the equipment. 

B. Install all high voltage (120 V or above) control wiring in EMT conduit. Install low 

voltage control wiring in conduit unless concealed in walls or above finished ceilings. 

Do not run low voltage control wiring in the same conduit as high voltage control or 

power wiring. 

3.15 WATER HEATER DRAIN PAN SYSTEM 

15400-16 



PLUMBING 

A. Install fiber glass drain pan under water heaters where scheduled and/or detailed on 

drawings. Install 3/4" drain line from drain pan to building exterior or where shown on 

drawing. 

3.16 EQUIPMENT, VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION 

A. Securely attach manufacturer's nameplate to all equipment giving data as to design 

and operating characteristics. 

B. Securely attach nameplates to all switches, control devices and similar items, giving 

the name and number of the item of equipment to which it is connected. 

C. Provide direction arrows and color bands every 25 feet where piping is located above 

lay-in type ceilings and in accessible attic and crawl spaces and within 5 feet of both 

sides of accessible wall penetrations for the following piping: 

1. Domestic hot water piping. 

2. Domestic cold water piping. 

3. Sanitary drain piping. 

4. Plumbing vent piping. 

D. Provide small scale drawing showing valve locations and valve number. Provide valve 

number on each valve tag. Intent of small scale drawing is to show what equipment 

each valve serves. 

3.17 TESTS 

A. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be limiting where additional 

testing methods are required by the authority having jurisdiction. 

B. All drainage, vent and inside conductor piping shall be tested before fixtures are 

installed by capping or plugging the openings and filling the entire system with water, 

allowing it to stand thus filled for 24 hours with at least 15 feet of pressure. If required 

to test system in sections, provide necessary test tees, plugs and stand pipe to test the 

system with at least 15 feet of pressure. Remake all leaking joints and retest. 

C. Test all water supply piping before fixtures, equipment and/or hydrants are connected. 

Cap or plug the openings, fill the system with water and apply a hydrostatic pressure of 

1.5 times the operating pressure or 125 PSIG, which ever is higher. Hold test 

pressures for at least 24 hours. Remake all leaking joints and retest. 

D. Test each fixture for soundness, stability of support and satisfactory operation of all its 

parts. 

3.18 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING 

A. Disinfect any part of potable water system installed or repaired in accordance with one 

of the following methods before it is placed in service: 

15400-17 



PLUMBING 

1. After tests are completed, fill all water supply systems with a solution containing 

50 PPM of available chlorine and allow to stand for a period of at least 6 hours 

before being flushed with clean water. Deliver a dated letter certifying 

sterilization to the Architect. 

2. After tests are completed, fill all water supply systems with a solution containing 

100 PPM of available chlorine and allow to stand for a period of at least 2 hours 

before being flushed with clean water. Deliver a dated letter certifying 

sterilization to the Architect. 

3.19 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 

A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to make 

system adjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct Owner's 

operating personnel in operation adjustment and maintenance procedures of system 

components and acquaint Owner's operating personnel with locations and functions of 

valves, control devices, etc., in the system. 

3.20 CLEANING AND RUBBISH 

A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the Work. 

Protect and prevent unnecessary induction of dirt into piping, fixtures and equipment. 

On completion of the Work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the Work and 

dispose of same. Thoroughly clean and leave in a satisfactory condition for use all 

equipment, pipe, fixtures, etc. 

3.21 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. The Architect will furnish one set of blue line prints of the drawings as issued for this 

contract. Use these prints to indicate accurately and neatly any deviation in the actual 

installation from the drawings as issued. At the completion of the job, deliver the 

marked-up drawings to the Architect for a permanent record of the exact location of all 

equipment, pipe runs, etc. as incorporated in the job. 

3.22 COMPLETE SYSTEMS 

A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working 

condition, as determined by the Architect. Furnish and install as part of this contract all 

apparatus and material obviously a part of the systems and necessary for their 

operation. 


15400-18 



SECTION 15500 

HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING 



A. The General Provisions of the Contract, Division 1, including the General 

Requirements, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, along with 

the General Requirements, are hereby made a part of this Section as if fully 

repeated herein. 

B. Scope of Work: The scope of the work included under this section of these 

specifications shall include complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning 

systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. This work shall 

include: 

1. Split-system heat pump and compressor/condenser units. 

2. Split system air handling units. 

3. Duct mounted air purification unit. 

4. Ventilating system. 

5. Refrigeration piping. 

6. Condensate drain piping. 

7. Condensate drain pan moisture monitor. 

8. Equipment supports, inertia bases, vibration isolators, and identification. 

9. Secondary condensate drain pans. 

10. Duct work. 


12. Access doors. 

13. Controls and control wiring. 

14. Testing, adjusting and balancing. 

15. Corrosion protection of outdoor condenser/heat pump units. 

16. Plan for pipe sleeve and duct opening locations. 

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 

1. Power wiring: Electrical – 16000. 

D. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the 

Architect to determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the 

drawings or specifications. The Contractor shall bring up for discussion and 

decision any questions concerning the project. No work shall be performed 

prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, time, and place of 

conference. 


A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this contract including but not 

limited to the Florida Energy Efficiency Code, Florida Building Code 2007 and 

Florida Building Code 2007 - Mechanical. Obtain information on all code 

15500-1 




restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict between the contract 

documents and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall be 

immediately brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra 

payment will not be allowed for Work required by code restrictions except 

through written agreement with the Owner. 

B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. 

Final payment is contingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect. 

C. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' 

Laboratories seal or ASME code stamp. Certificates to this effect shall be 

furnished to the Architect upon request. 

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Industry Standards: Unless modified by these specifications, the design, 

manufacture, testing and method of installing all materials, apparatus and 

equipment shall conform to the following: 

1. ASHRAE Standard 90, Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 

2. ANSI B9.1 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 

3. Standards of National Fire Protection Association. 

4. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 

5. SMACNA Standards for Duct work. 

6. Associated Air Balance Council Standards for Field Measurement and 

Instrumentation. 

7. Underwriters' Laboratories. 

8. National Electrical Code. 

9. Air Moving & Conditioning Association. 

10. Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute. 

11. Industrial Ventilation Manual (American Conference of Governmental 

Industrial Hygienists). 


A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the Work before 

submitting bid. Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions 

including access and work space limitations. 


A. Refer to the general construction drawings which are bound with the drawings 

of this Work for construction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and structural 

drawings shall take precedence over Division 15 drawings (Mechanical 

Drawings). It is the intent of the Mechanical Drawings to show the general 

arrangement of the system and not to indicate all offsets, fittings and 

accessories which may be required, nor to show exact locations of piping, duct 

work or equipment except where actual dimensions are given. All vertical 

piping shall be located in walls in finished spaces unless otherwise noted. 

15500-2 




B. Specifications and drawings shall be considered as supplementary to each 

other, requiring materials and labor indicated, specified, or implied by either 

specifications or drawings. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications to 

call for finished Work, tested, and ready for operation, and in complete 

conformance with all applicable codes, rules and regulations. Minor details not 

usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for the proper installation 

and operation of the various systems, shall be included in the Work and in the 

proposal, the same as if specified or shown on the drawings. 

C. If any departures from the drawings and specifications are deemed necessary, 

details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the 

Architect for approval. No departures shall be made without prior approval of 

the Architect. 

D. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, 

fixture or type of construction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog 

number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not 

be construed as limiting competition. Substitutes may be used subject to 

compliance with requirements set forth in the General Requirements, Division 

1, and as approved by the Architect. 

E. Submit cost implications to contract in bid when providing substitutes for 

specified equipment and for all alternatives requested in the construction 

documents. 

1.6 MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Where the name of a concern or manufacturer is mentioned on the Drawings or 

in Specifications in reference to his required service or product, and no 

qualifications or specification of such is included, then the material gauges, 

details of manufacturer, finish, etc., shall be in accordance with his standard 

practice, directions or specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for 

any infringement of patents, royalties, or copyrights which may be incurred 

thereby. 

B. Equipment scheduled on drawings was used to arrive at space, maintenance 

access, utility service and equipment supports. If other equipment is submitted 

and approved, take responsibility for maintaining these space, maintenance 

access, utility service requirements and any revisions required for installation 

such as equipment supports, roof curbs and access ladders. Take 

responsibility for the coordination and cost for any resulting changes including 

cost to change electrical service required by substituted equipment. 

C. All materials and equipment shall be new and first class in every respect. As 

far as is practical, similar products shall be by one manufacturer. Equipment 

designed to operate as a system such as outdoor condenser or heat pump 

units with indoor air handling units shall be from one manufacturer unless 

scheduled otherwise. 


15500-3 




A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Requirements, Division 

1. 

B. Samples of insulation, diffusers, dampers or any other mechanical equipment 

or materials shall be submitted if requested by the Architect. If a sample is 

requested, have the sample delivered to the Architect or arrange for the 

Architect to examine it elsewhere. Failure to comply may be cause for 

rejection. 

C. Submit shop drawings or catalog data for the Architect's approval before 

purchasing or installing the following: 

1. Split-system compressor/condenser. 

2. Air handling units. 

3. Grilles, diffusers and registers. 

4. Duct shop drawing (where different from design drawing). 

5. Duct mounted air purification unit. 

6. Exhaust and supply fans. 


8. Secondary condensate drain pans. 

9. Vibration isolators and inertia bases. 

10. Controls and wiring diagrams. 

D. Submit detailed and dimension plan showing all pipe sleeves and duct 

openings required in building structure including floors and roof deck. 

1.8 PERFORMANCE DATA 

A. All performance data specified herein shall be considered actual performance 

of equipment as installed. Make suitable allowances if installation details are 

such that actual operating conditions unfavorably affect performance as 

compared to conditions under which the equipment was rated. 

1.9 CATALOG, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Provide four (4) complete sets of a compilation of catalog data of each 

manufactured item of equipment used in the Mechanical Work. In addition to 

the catalog data, installation, operating and maintenance data and bill of 

materials for all operating equipment shall be submitted. Each of the four sets 

of data shall be bound in loose leaf binders and submitted to the Architect 

before final payment is made. A complete double index shall be provided as 

follows: 

1. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 

2. Listing the names of manufacturers alphabetically by name together with 

their addresses and the names and addresses of local sales 

representatives. 

B. It is the intent of this catalog, operation and maintenance data to provide the 

Owner with complete instructions on the proper operation and use, lubrication 

and periodic maintenance, together with the source of replacement parts and 

service, for the items of equipment covered. 

15500-4 




1.10 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION 

A. The Electrical Contractor will furnish, set and wire all disconnect devices and 

starters as required for all equipment except for those items furnished with 

integral disconnect devices and/or starters. 

B. Furnish detailed information to the Electrical Contractor on power wiring 

requirements for all mechanical equipment actually purchased as soon as 

practical. This shall include all diagrams and instructions necessary for the 

Electrical Contractor to make connections properly. If equipment actually 

purchased requires larger electrical service than equipment scheduled, arrange 

and pay for required electrical service change. 

C. Provide all air conditioning control devices, including thermostats, and 

complete all control wiring, including final connections. 

D. Coordinate location of equipment, piping, and duct work with Electrical 

Contractor and Plumbing Contractor to maintain clearance for equipment 

maintenance, prevent interference with duct and piping runs, and to prevent 

ducts and piping from being installed over electrical panels. If interference 

develops, the Architect will decide which equipment, conduit, duct, piping, etc., 

must be relocated regardless of installation order. Take responsibility for 

relocating Mechanical work, if so ordered, including all associated costs. 

E. Within 30 days following award of the contract, report to the Architect in writing, 

all real or potential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on the Mechanical Work 

or between the trades and obtain an agreement with the Architect on a solution. 

Those reported after 30 days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, 

shall be resolved at the discretion of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting 

from the progress of Work to the Architect immediately or accept the expense 

for corrective work caused by failure to report such a conflict. 

1.11 CHANGES 

A. Do not make any changes in design without the written approval of the 

Architect. Changes in design means any change which will affect the capacity, 

reliability, operation or safety of the systems or any parts thereof, including 

changes which may be required to conform to local regulations or codes. 

1.12 MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY 

A. Provide written warranties as specified in the General Requirements, Division 

1, and provide a five year warranty for all refrigeration compressors against 

defects in materials and workmanship. Repair any defects becoming apparent 

within the warranty period as directed by the Architect. 

1.13 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Provide complete protection against weather, rain, windstorms, frost, ice, heat, 

and acts of vandalism, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from 

injury or damage, including physical damage of any nature. At end of each 

15500-5 




workday, cover work as required to provide such protection. This shall include 

but not be limited to erection of all temporary shelters to protect adequately any 

materials and equipment stored on site, cribbing of any materials and 

equipment above the floor of the construction, and the covering of materials 

and equipment in the building under construction with protective covering. 

B. Provide dry storage facilities for materials and equipment; including but not 

limited to duct work, insulation, air handling units, *VAV boxes, fan terminal 

units, controls, motor operated equipment, etc.; sensitive to damage by 

moisture. Outside, unprotected storage will not be accepted. Storage inside 

building being constructed will not be accepted until roof and walls are weather 

tight unless temporary protection is provided. 

C. Failure to comply shall be sufficient cause for rejection of damaged materials 

and equipment. Replace any damaged material or equipment and place the 

systems in perfect working condition. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM COMPRESSOR/CONDENSER UNITS 

A. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings and adjusted for line losses of 

refrigerant piping. Capacity shall be combined rating at actual conditions 

entering the evaporator and 95 degrees F outdoor ambient temperature. 

B. Unit shall have all operating components assembled on one common base. 

These shall include: compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan and motor, 

charging valves, all controls, and a holding charge of refrigerant. Units shall be 

designed for outdoor installation with all exterior surfaces factory painted with 

primer and enamel for weather protection. Drain holes shall be provided for 

elimination of rain. Provide removable panels for access to components. 

C. Condenser coil shall be of the continuous *aluminum *copper [option on units > 

5 tons] plate fin and copper tube type and shall be circuited for integral subcooler. 

The coil shall be tested with refrigerant and sealed with a holding 

charge of refrigerant. 

D. Compressor shall be mounted on vibration isolators. 

E. Refrigeration circuit components shall include liquid line service valve, suction 

line service valve, and full charge of compressor oil and holding charge of 

refrigerant. 

F. Controls shall be mounted in separate panel on the side of the unit for 

installation and service access. Units shall be provided with controls specified 

on the drawings and all standard controls including the following even if not 

considered standard: 

1. Single point power connection. 

2. Compressor and fan contactors. 

3. Motor overload protection for ungrounded legs. 

4. Crankcase oil heater. 

15500-6 




5. High pressure cut-out. 

6. Auto reset low-pressure switch to stop compressor if refrigerant pressure 

drops below 7 psig. 

7. Compressor anti-cycling relays set between 3 and 5 minutes. 

8. Low-ambient controller down to 30º F. for winter operation. 

9. Evaporator freeze thermostat to stop unit operation if evaporator reaches 

freeze-up conditions. 

10. Indoor time delay relay to continue indoor blower motor after compressor 

cycles off. 

11. Refrigerant filter dryer (two-way for heat pumps). 

12. Adjustable outdoor thermostat to prevent supplemental electric heat from 

operating except during defrost mode or when outside air temperature is 

below set-point (40 F). 

13. Thermostatic expansion valve kit. 

14. Liquid solenoid valve to stop and start liquid refrigerant flow in response 

to compressor operation. 

G. Approved Manufacturers: Carrier, Lennox, McQuay, Trane, York. 

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS 

A. Air handling units shall be draw through type with 1" thick, standard size filters 

and shall have DX cooling coils and electric heating coils as scheduled on 

drawings with minimum unit capacities as indicated. 

B. Fan capacities shall be as scheduled on drawings. Fans shall be direct drive 

with two or three speed motors or belt drive as scheduled. Fans and motors 

shall be mounted on vibration isolators. 

C. Casing shall be constructed of heavy duty, factory painted, galvanized sheet 

steel adequately reinforced with structural members. Units shall include plastic 

drain pan, with at least 1" thick insulation, extending under coil and fan sections 

with brass drain connection. Removable panels in front of unit shall provide 

access to all internal parts. Units shall have filter access panel and filter rack. 

All unit panels shall be internally insulated to meet requirements of the Florida 

Energy Code. All insulating materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90- 

A. Units shall be equipped with duct collars on intake and discharge of unit and 

single point power connection. 

D. Direct expansion cooling coils shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and 

copper tube type and shall have an equalizing type distributor. The coil shall be 

tested with refrigerant and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen at 10 PSIG. 

E. Electric heating coil shall be factory installed and protected with air flow switch. 

Heaters over 10 KW shall have heating elements sequenced on and off in at 

least two stages and shall be wired for multiple stage operation. All heaters 

shall be equipped with manual reset thermal overload device, current overload 

for heaters above 10 KW and required heating and cooling system controls 

including 60 VA control circuit (24 v) transformer. Low-voltage connections 

shall be point-to-point on terminal board. 

F. Unit controls shall include but not be limited to solid-state interlock control 

board, control transformer, and evaporator freeze thermostat. 

15500-7 




G. Approved Manufacturers: Carrier, Lennox, McQuay, Trane, York. 

2.3 DUCT MOUNTED AIR PURIFICATION UNITS 

A. Air purification unit shall be "DUCTWORX" as manufactured by Ecoquest 

international or pre-approved equal. Units can be obtained from Ecoquest Pure 

Water and Air [Office (912) 882-4006 or cell (904) 610-8482 or e-mail 

jmcosman@ecoquestintl.com]. 

2.4 WALL PROPELLER SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS 

A. Fans shall be of size, drive type, capacity, and electrical characteristics 

scheduled on drawings. Accessories shall be as scheduled. Complete unit 

shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories and be in full accordance 

with all provisions of the National Electric Code. 

B. Fan frame shall be heavy gauge painted steel with fan assembly bolted to 

frame for ease of removal and service. Fan bearings shall be of ball bearing 

type with minimum average life of 100,000 hours. Fan blades shall be heavy 

duty steel. Fan drives shall be designed for at least 165% of rated horsepower 

capabilities. 

C. Pre-wired, factory mounted speed controller for direct drive units. 

D. Approved Manufacturers: Acme, Aerovent, American Coolair, Greenheck, 

Hartzell, Loren Cook, Penn Ventilator, Swartwout, Twin City. 

2.5 SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS 

A. Fans shall be of size, type and capacity indicated on the drawings. Power 

supply shall be as scheduled. The complete units shall be approved by the 

Underwriters' Laboratories and be in full accordance with all provisions of the 

National Electric Code. 

B. Provide fan with internal integral thermal protector and unit mounted 

disconnect. 

C. Pre-wired, factory mounted speed controller for direct drive units. 

D. Approved Manufacturers: Acme, Aerovent, American Coolair, Greenheck, 

Hartzell, Loren Cook, Penn Ventilator, Swartwout, Twin City. 

2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Piping shall be type "L" hard drawn copper with wrought copper, refrigerant 

grade fittings. All elbows shall be long radius. 

B. Moisture indicator shall be installed in the liquid line just before the refrigerant 

solenoid valve. Thermostatic expansion valves shall be provided for each 

evaporator circuit. Valves shall be equipped with external equalizer. 

15500-8 




2.7 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING AND SECONDARY DRAIN PAN 

A. Condensate piping located inside building below ceilings shall be non-insulated 

schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 

B. Secondary drain pans shall be fabricated from a single sheet of minimum 18 

gage stainless steel or minimum 1/8" thick fiberglass to form a 4" deep 

minimum seamless pan with formed and sealed corners. Pan shall be provided 

with 24 volt water detector to shut down the air handling unit when any water 

enters the drain pan. Water detector shall be UL listed and approved for use by 

local authority. Mechanical float switches are not acceptable. 

C. Alternative to the secondary condensate drain pan, subject to local approval of 

local municipal Authority having jurisdiction, is a condensate drain trap float 

switch shall be "EZ-TRAP" model EZT-225 or approved equal. (EZ TRAP 3 

Kellogg Court, Unit 10, Edison, NJ 08817 phone 732-248-8066). 

2.8 PIPE HANGERS 

A. Pipe hangers for refrigerant and condensate piping located inside building shall 

be non-metallic strap hangers designed to rigidly support piping without 

damage to pipe insulation. 

B. Pipe hangers shall be Auto-Grip, Fee and Mason, Grinnel, galvanized steel 

clevis hangers, roller or fixed as shown on drawings, selected within the 

manufacturer's published load ratings. 

C. Hangers for copper pipe shall be either copper-plated type or there shall be a 

shield of 4 pounds sheet lead to completely surround the pipe to prevent direct 

contact with the hanger. 

D. Supports for pipes with vapor barrier type covering shall not contact the pipe 

but shall surround the unbroken covering. Provide galvanized steel shields with 

mitered corners properly formed to the jacket outside diameter between hanger 

clevises and the lower 1/3 of the circumference. Size shields as follows: 

1. Pipe up to 1" 18 gauge x 8" long 

2. 1-1/4" to 2" 16 gauge x 12" long 

3. 2-1/2" to 4" 14 gauge x 16" long 

4. 5" and larger 12 gauge x 20" long 

E. Use vibration isolators in hanger rods to isolate vibration in piping subject to 

vibration, or where shown on drawings. 

2.9 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS 

A. Sleeves shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or pre-formed plastic. Sleeves 

shall be sized to allow approximately 1/8" gap around the pipe or its insulation. 

B. Sleeves through floors or fire walls shall be galvanized steel pipe of proper 

size. Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/2" above the finished floor. Sleeves 

penetrating fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings shall be filled with fire-rated 

15500-9 




material capable of maintaining the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor or 

ceiling. 

C. Escutcheon plates for finished spaces shall be nickel-plated. 

2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, VIBRATION ISOLATORS, AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. Equipment supports shall be sized and designed to support the equipment and 

shall be fabricated from galvanized steel. 

B. Hangers for horizontal air handling units including in-line supply and exhaust 

fans and fan terminal units shall be sized for equipment load but shall not be 

less than 3/8" diameter steel rod and shall have spring isolators designed for 1" 

maximum deflection. Hanger straps and/or wire will not be accepted. 

C. Supports for vertical air handling units up thru 2,000 cfm shall be fabricated 

from galvanized steel angles designed to support the unit. Angles shall be at 

least 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4" thick. Supports shall be designed to allow clearance 

for return air ducts or plenum. 

D. Vibration isolators for air handling units over 2,000 cfm, except for AHUs 

scheduled to have secondary drain pans or equipment scheduled to have 

concrete inertia base, shall be housed spring type vibration isolators, similar to 

Kinetics Model SL and SM, sized for equipment load, and designed for 1" 

maximum deflection. Air handling units with internal spring isolation shall have 

neoprene inertia pads, similar to Kinetics Model NP or NG, sized and designed 

for unit load. 

E. Vibration isolators for floor-mounted air handling units with secondary drain 

pans shall be neoprene inertia pads, similar to Kinetics Model NP or NG, sized 

and designed for unit load. 

F. Vibration rails shall be provide for rooftop A/C unit roof curbs mounted between 

rooftop unit and top of roof curb. Vibration rails shall be designed for each 

specific rooftop unit. 

G. Concrete inertia base and spring isolators for equipment scheduled to have 

concrete inertia base shall be designed for equipment load to prevent 

equipment vibration transmission to floor. Inertia base frames shall be preengineered 

welded steel pouring frames with welded-in concrete reinforcement, 

equipment mounting bolts and vibration isolator bracket. Frames shall be 

similar to Kinetics Model CIB-H or L depending on equipment type. 

H. All identification legends shall be stenciled on pressure-sensitive labeling 

material approved by the Architect. Labeling material colors for use on piping 

shall be as specified in ANSI A 13.1 latest revision. Equipment labels shall be 

laminated, phenolic strips 1/16" thick and engraved to show black letters on 

white background not less than 1/4" high. 

I. Valve tags shall be plastic, aluminum or brass at least 1" in diameter and 

stamped with contrasting colored figures as large as possible. 

15500-10 




J. Pipe markers shall be Seton style RPM or approved equal. 

2.11 MOTORS 

A. Full Load Motor Efficiencies: All motors installed in equipment specified in 

these specifications shall be classified under the National Electric 

Manufacturers Association's Standard as "Energy Efficient" or shall otherwise 

meet the requirements of the Florida Energy Code. 

B. Except where otherwise specified, all motors shall be designed for continuous 

service and for regular starting on full-line voltage with normal starting current. 

The limits on service factor and temperature rise above 40º C. ambient at rated 

load shall be as follows: 

1. Motor Enclosure Service Factor Temperature Rise 

2. Drip-Proof 115% 40º C. 

3. Totally Enclosed None 55º C. 

C. The insulation portion of the motor leads between the lug and motor frame shall 

be at least 5" in length when four or less motor leads are used and at least 8" in 

length when more than four motor leads are used. When terminal type lugs are 

supplied, they shall be solderless, Burndy "Hy-Dent" type or approved equal. 

D. Motors shall be furnished for operation as specified or as noted on the 

drawings. All motors shall conform to IEEE, NEMA and ANSI standards. 

E. Motors furnished for indoor installation shall be of the open, drip-proof design. 

Motors furnished for installation in wet locations or outdoors shall be of the 

totally-enclosed design. Motors furnished for installation in hazardous locations 

shall be of the explosion-proof design. 

2.12 DUCT WORK 

A. Supply air, return air, outside air, transfer air and exhaust air (except kitchen 

hood and laboratory hood exhaust) duct work, and return air plenums under 

vertical air handling units shall be galvanized sheet metal. 

B. Fabricate sheet metal duct work in accordance with latest edition of "HVAC 

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" as published by SMACNA 

and to meet construction requirements for 1" W.G. minimum static pressure and 

seal class "C". 

C. Fabricate and seal duct joints and connections such that air leakage does not 

exceed five (5) percent of design air volume. 

D. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are finished inside dimensions. Increase 

duct sizes to allow for double wall construction, acoustic duct liner or fiberglass 

duct system wall thickness where applicable. 

E. Changes in direction, including Tees, in square and rectangular duct work for 

both supply air, outside air, and return air shall be made with mitered elbows 

fitted with closely spaced full radius air foil type turning vanes constructed for 

15500-11 




maintaining constant velocity through elbow. Changes in direction in supply 

and return ducts may be made with radius elbows instead of mitered elbows 

and turning vanes if space limitations permit or if shown on drawings. Radius 

elbows in round duct work do not require turning vanes for either supply or 

return air. 

2.13 A/C DUCT WORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Manual balance/volume dampers shall be opposed blade type and shall be 16 

gauge minimum galvanized steel with zinc-plated hardware and bronze or nylon 

bearings. Blades shall not be over 8" wide nor less than 16 gage galvanized 

steel. Maximum leakage shall be less than 1% at static pressure of 4" W.G. 

Provide locking quadrant damper operators on manual dampers. 

B. Provide 24 V electric operators on automatic dampers. Electric operators shall 

be oil immersed gear train type with spring return and shall function 

proportionally or pulsed directly for position control. 

C. Turning vanes shall be factory fabricated full radius double thickness air foil 

type with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes. 

D. Extractors at branch take-offs shall be adjustable push rod type with locking 

hardware. Extractors at sidewall supply grilles shall be adjustable by removing 

the grille face. 

E. Splitters shall be constructed of at least the same gauge galvanized steel as 

the duct wherein they are used and shall not be less than 24 gauge. Blades 

shall be formed in two thickness of metal to provide rounded nose to air flow. 

F. Access doors shall be factory fabricated, double wall insulated type of 24 

gauge minimum galvanized steel. Doors shall be non-hinged, completely 

removable with hand operated adjustable tension catches and shall be 

completely gasketed around their perimeter. Doors shall be as large as the 

duct size will permit (within 1" of each duct edge) and large enough to permit 

access to fire dampers and other items requiring access. Doors larger than 12" 

shall have latches on all four sides. 

G. Flexible connectors shall meet requirements of UL 191 for Class 1 connectors. 

2.14 FLEXIBLE DUCT 

A. Flexible duct shall be pre-insulated type, listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, 

Inc., Class 1 ducts, polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel 

wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film and shall conform to 

NFPA Bulletin 90-A. 

B. Duct shall be designed for pressure rating of 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 

0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative. Maximum air velocity shall be 4000 fpm. 

C. Insulation shall be the required thickness and material to provide a minimum 

thermal resistance "R" of 6.0 when located outside of the building thermal 

15500-12 




envelop and “R” of 4.2 when located inside the building thermal envelope. 

Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. 

D. Flexible duct connectors shall be stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex 

screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action. 

2.15 INSULATION – GENERAL 

A. All insulation materials and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke 

developed ratings per NFPA Bulletin 90-A when tested in accordance with 

ASTM Standard E-84. Smoke developed less than or equal to 50, and flame 

spread less than or equal to 25. All coatings and mastics shall be 

nonflammable in wet state. 

B. Approved Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, CertainTeed Corp., 

Manville, IMCOA, NOMACO, Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., Pittsburg 

Corning Corp. 

2.16 DUCT WORK INSULATION 

A. General: Duct insulation shall be the required thickness and material to provide 

a minimum thermal resistance "R" of 8 when duct is located outside building, 

"R" of 6.0 when duct is located in areas within the building but on the non-air 

conditioned side of the building insulation and 4.2 when located on the air 

conditioned side of the building insulation unless otherwise noted on the 

drawings. These R values are "as-installed" minimums. Insulation nominal 

thickness shall not exceed 2". 

B. Flexible external insulation shall be fiberglass and shall have an "as-packaged" 

R value not less than 25% greater than the required "as-installed" value and 

shall have a duplex laminated, reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. 

C. Semi-rigid external insulation shall be fiberglass and shall have an "aspackaged" 

R value not less than the required "as-installed" value and shall 

have all service jacket (ASJ) facing. 

D. Acoustical duct liner shall be fiberglass insulation with air stream side faced 

with nonabrasive, fire-resistant coating to minimize air flow resistance and 

prevent microbial growth per ASTM G21 and G22. Maximum K factor shall be 

0.23 (BTU x inch) / (sq. ft. x º F. x hr). Thickness shall be determined by 

required "R" value depending on duct location. Minimum of 1" thick duct liner 

with additional external insulation sufficient to provide required "R" value may 

be use. ToughGard Duct Liner as manufactured by CertainTeed or approved 

equal. 

E. Extruded polystyrene insulation shall have following properties: 

1. Density: 1.35 P.C.F minimum. 

2. Resistance at 75º F: 5.0 (HR x SF x º F.)/(BTU x inch) minimum.\Water 

Vapor: 1.1 perm-in maximum. 

3. Water absorption: 0.3 % by volume maximum. 

15500-13 




F. Aluminum Jacketing: 0.016" thick minimum with bands and seals of same 

material by Premetco International or approved equal. 

G. Glass Cloth and Mastic Jacket: 

1. Glass cloth shall have breaking strength not less than 76 pounds per 

inch, warp, and 90 pounds per inch, weft. Thickness shall be 6 mils 

minimum. Finish shall be pressure sensitive adhesive designed to be 

applied over aluminized film type vapor barrier jacket. Material shall be 

as manufactured by PermaGlas-Mesh, Inc. or approved equal. 

2. Mastic shall be white, vinyl acrylic weather barrier material designed for 

outdoor applications over glass cloth. Mastic shall be WC-7 as 

manufactured by Vimasco Corporation or approved equal. 

H. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 

1. ASTM C921, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and 

bonded to aluminized film. 

2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 

3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 

4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 

2.17 REFRIGERANT SUCTION PIPING INSULATION 

A. Above grade piping inside building and when installed in PVC conduit: 3/4" 

thick, pre-formed, flame-retardant, elastomeric, polyethylene, pipe insulation 

similar to IMCOA Imolock or NOMACO Nomalock, and installed in accordance 

with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Exposed piping outside building: 3/4" thick, pre-formed, flame-retardant, 

elastomeric, polyethylene, pipe insulation similar to IMCOA Imolock or 

NOMACO Nomalock, and installed in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions and, in addition, provide banded aluminum jackets to floor or wall 

penetration. Install and secure aluminum jackets in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Below grade and when not installed in PVC conduit: 1" thick, pre-formed rigid 

cellular glass type similar to Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas, installed in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Finish with 2 coats of asphalt 

base mastic equal to Foster 60-25 reinforced with layer of glass fabric. 

2.18 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING INSULATION 

A. Primary condensate copper piping, if used instead of schedule 40 PVC, shall 

be insulated with 1/2", pre-formed, flame-retardant, elastomeric, polyethylene, 

pipe insulation similar to IMCOA Imolock and Armstrong Armaflex, or, in dry 

locations, 1/2" thick 3.5 pound density molded fiberglass with all-purpose, high 

density, white kraft bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn 

jacket. Insulation located in supply or return air plenums shall meet all state 

and local code requirements for plenum use. Install pipe insulation in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

15500-14 




B. Copper or PVC used for primary or secondary condensate piping located inside 

building above ceilings shall be insulated with 1/2", pre-formed, flame-retardant, 

elastomeric, polyethylene, pipe insulation similar to IMCOA Imolock and 

Armstrong Armaflex, or, in dry locations, 1/2" thick 3.5 pound density molded 

fiberglass with all-purpose, high density, white kraft bonded to aluminum foil, 

reinforced with fiberglass yarn jacket. Install pipe insulation in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions. 

2.19 PIPE INSULATION JACKETING, BANDING, AND TAPING 

A. All service jacketing: Kraft Paper aluminum foil/vinyl coating fire retardant 

construction by Lamtec Corp., Alpha Associates, or approved equal. 

B. Aluminum jacketing: 0.016" thick minimum with 1/2" wide bands and seals of 

same material by Premetco International or approved equal. 

C. PVC jacketing: 0.03" thick minimum with self sealing laps and heavy duty fitting 

covers of matching thickness by Proto Corp or approved equal. All PVC shall 

have flame and smoke rating of 25/50 or less and be UV resistant. 

D. PITTCOTE® 404 coating and PC® fabric 79 reinforcing by Pittsburgh Corning. 

No alternatives accepted. 

E. Fiber reinforced tape 3/4" wide Scotch Brand #8934 by 3M or approved equal. 

2.20 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 

A. Air distribution devices shall be as scheduled on the drawings. All supply 

diffusers shall be selected to deliver the indicated volume of supply air without 

exceeding the available throw and with an NC rating not to exceed 25, including 

half open damper. Submittal data shall clearly indicate performance of selected 

devices including air quantity, pattern, throw, pressure drop, sound level, finish, 

dimensions and construction of all air distribution devices. 

B. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plans for exact location of air distribution 

devices. All non-linear supply, return and exhaust diffusers, grilles and 

registers shall be steel construction unless scheduled otherwise and shall have 

baked enamel finish with color selected by the Architect. In lieu of aluminized 

steel, steel grills and diffusers with thermoset Alkyd-Melamine painting system 

applied by an electro-deposition system that totally submerges the entire 

product in the paint followed by a baking process at 315º F., similar to process 

used by Titus, will be accepted. This optional material and paint system shall 

pass ASTM D-1654, 300 hour Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test, ASTM 

D 870, 500 hour Water Immersion Test, and ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact 

Cracking Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of paint surface. 

C. Ceiling surface and sidewall supply registers shall, unless otherwise scheduled, 

have opposed blade type key operated dampers with a detachable key. One 

(1) key shall be furnished for each register. 

D. Linear supply and return diffusers shall be as scheduled on drawings. Material 

shall be steel. Finish shall be selected by the Architect. 

15500-15 




E. Thermally powered VAV diffusers shall be Therma-fuser as manufactured by 

Acutherm, Hayward, CA. Diffusers shall be thermally powered using two room 

temperature sensing elements (one for cooling control and one for heating 

control) and one changeover element for switching the diffuser from cooling 

mode to heating mode by sensing supply air temperature. All sensing elements 

shall be built into diffuser. Room temperature sensing elements shall be field 

adjustable. Changeover element shall be factory set to engage heating mode 

at 81º F and engage cooling mode at 70º F. *Optional wall mounted, remote, 

adjustable, temperature controls shall be provided as scheduled. Diffusers 

shall have five (5) year warranty. 

F. Approved Manufacturers: Acutherm, Anemostat, Krueger, Metalaire, Metal 

Industries, Nailor, Price, Seiho, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey. 

2.21 OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST AIR LOUVERS 

A. Wall louvers shall be drainable type with drain gutter in each blade and downspouts 

in frame jambs and mullions. Frame and blade material to be anodized 

extruded aluminum construction, anodize color to be selected by the Architect. 

Frame shall contain integral caulking slots. Insect screen shall be installed on 

building side of louver. Insect screens on air intake louvers shall be made 

accessible from the building side of louver through access doors in duct work or 

from the outside through removable louver frame. 

B. Frame and blade material for louvers in soffit to be anodized extruded 

aluminum construction, anodize color to be selected by the Architect. Insect 

screen shall be installed on building side of louver. Insect screens on air intake 

louvers shall be accessible from the outside through a removable louver frame. 

C. Design shall incorporate structural supports required to withstand minimum 

wind load of 110 mph. Louver size shall be as scheduled on drawing. 

D. Published performance data must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication 

and must demonstrate pressure drop and water penetration equal to or less 

than unit scheduled on drawings. 

E. Approved Manufacturers: Arrow, Empco, Ruskin, United Air. 

2.22 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Fire dampers shall be of the guillotine type, spring loaded, fusible link, U.L. 

approved, and in accordance with NFPA Bulletin 90-A requirements. 

Construction shall be galvanized steel. Dampers shall be similar to Ruskin 

model DIBD2 STYLE B, or type detailed on drawings. Dampers shall be sizes 

as shown on drawings and shall stack out of air stream on all ducts. 

B. Fire dampers at ceiling diffusers shall be spring loaded, fusible link, U.L. 

approved, and in accordance with NFPA requirements. Dampers shall be 

similar to Ruskin model CFD2 as scheduled and of sizes shown for 

diffusers/grilles on the drawings. 

15500-16 




C. Approved Manufacturers: Airstream Balance, Inc., Metal Industries, Ruskin, 

United Air. 

2.23 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR ALL CONDENSER UNITS 

A. Provide corrosion protection for all condenser/heat pump units. Corrosion 

protection system shall be Bronze Glow, Heresite, Adsil, or pre-approved equal, 

applied only by applicators certified and/or licensed by system manufacturer. 

2.24 CONTROLS 

A. Room temperature thermostats shall be programmable type designed for 

cooling and electric heating or heat pump with electric emergency heating 

applications as applicable. Unit shall have automatic heating/cooling 

changeover with system light; digital display indicating time of day, day of week, 

room temperature, current program operating mode, and current active stage; 3 

hour timed override; two occupied and two unoccupied programs per day; 

keyboard disable to prevent tampering; 7-day program basis; status indicating 

lights displayed in digital display; constant fan operation during occupied mode; 

auto fan operation during setback (set applicable dip switch or program mode); 

integral temperature sensor. "Auto" fan mode shall allow supply fan to run only 

when cooling or heating is required by the room thermostat. 

B. Motor operated dampers shall have aluminum frames and aluminum air foil 

blades with synthetic elastomeric mechanically attached, field replaceable 

blade seals. Electric actuators shall be manufactured by Belimo and shall be 

selected for the required operating characteristics compatible with the control 

system. 

C. Provide clear plastic lockable covers to fit over all thermostats. Cover shall 

have vent holes top and bottom to provide fast thermal response for thermostat. 


A. Access doors shall be as similar to those manufactured by Milcor Division of 

Inland-Ryerson of type as follows: 

1. Door Location Door Type 

2. Drywall Style "DW" 

3. Masonry or Tile Style "M-Stainless" 

4. Acoustical Tile Style "AT" 

5. Plaster Style "K" 

6. Fire Rated Walls/Ceilings Style "Fire Rated" 

B. Each door shall be equipped with two flush, screwdriver operated, cam latches 

and, other than Style "M", shall be finished to match adjacent surface. Door 

sizes shall be applicable to access required for normal service. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

15500-17 




3.1 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 

A. Examine the site and all drawings before proceeding with the layout and 

installation of the Work. 

B. Arrange the Work essentially as shown, exact layout to be made on the job to 

suit actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all 

Work will be installed in proper relationship and coordinate precise location of 

parts with the Work of others. 

C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings with the General Contractor 

including locations of required pipe sleeves through walls and foundations. 

Assume liability for cutting or patching made necessary by failure to make 

proper arrangements in this respect. Provide detailed and dimension plan 

showing all pipe sleeves and duct openings required in building structure 

including floors and roof deck. 

D. Indicated equipment connections are necessarily based on equipment of a 

given manufacture. Assume responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, 

ducts, etc. to connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. 

Follow equipment manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in 

the installation and connection of all equipment. In case of conflict between 

manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify the Architect 

before proceeding. No equipment installation or connections shall be made in a 

manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty. 

E. Duct work shown on drawings is designed to produce required air quantity at 

estimated pressure drop which is used for air handling unit air quantity, 

pressure, and motor horsepower. Actual field installation may result in lower or 

higher pressure drop at the design air quantity which may require adjustment of 

fan speed. Take responsibility for this adjustment including replacement of fan 

sheave, if required, to obtain required air quantity and maintain required duct 

static pressure. 

F. Install all Work in a neat and workmanlike manner, using only workmen 

thoroughly qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough Work will 

be rejected. 

3.2 DUCT MOUNTED AIR PURIFICATION UNITS 

A. Install air purification unit in supply air duct where shown on drawings. 

Connect power cord to 110 VAC outlet located near air handling unit. 

3.3 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE INSTALLATION 

A. Install condensate piping in a workmanlike manner, according to the best 

practice of the trade, properly pitched and vented to eliminate air pockets or 

traps, and to ensure rapid drainage from each unit. Cut pipe squarely to 

accurate length for full penetration into fittings. Remove burrs from ends of 

PVC pipe, clean joining surfaces thoroughly and form all joints in accordance 

with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 

15500-18 




B. Provide a valve, female hose connection with hose thread cap and rubber 

washer, and 4" deep trap to prevent back suction into the air unit as detailed on 

drawings. 

C. Run condensate drain line from each A/C unit as noted on the drawings. 

D. Install condensate drain trap float switch, when approved by local municipal 

Authority having jurisdiction, to turn off unit if condensate backs up in trap. 

E. Install all condensate lines located underground or under the building floor in 

PVC conduit with wide sweep elbows. Seal space between piping and PVC 

conduit at each end of conduit to eliminate entry of water. 

3.4 CONDENSATE DRAIN PAN MOISTURE MONITORS 

A. Install Liebert “Liqui-tect 410" or approved equal moisture monitor in each 

condensate drain pan in and all air handling units unless the units are provided 

with secondary drains or condensate drain trap float switches. Bond the 

monitor mounting legs, do not use mechanical fasteners such as screws or 

bolts, to the condensate drain pan bottom with adhesive suitable for the 

application. Adjust the height of the monitor contacts at least ¼” below top 

edge of drain pan. Connect moisture monitor output contacts to *rooftop units 

*and air handling units to shut down the unit fan(s) if water is detected within 

1/4" of the condensate drain pan top and adjust moisture monitor probes 

accordingly. Provide 24 VAC or VDC source and connect to moisture monitor. 

3.5 REFRIGERANT PIPE INSTALLATION 

A. Size and install all refrigerant piping to complete the system connecting heat 

pumps/condensers to air handlers in accordance with the equipment 

manufacturer's instructions based on equipment size, route of piping, and good 

refrigeration system practice. Layout piping in most direct route to minimize 

amount of system refrigerant. Install refrigerant tube size to minimize pressure 

drop and provide for oil return to compressor. Braze all joints with 15% 

minimum silver alloy solder. 

B. Run horizontal piping above ceilings and vertical piping inside walls in finished 

spaces (not including mechanical rooms). 

C. After completion of entire system and before any pipe is covered, test the entire 

refrigerant circuit to assure that it is absolutely tight. Conduct low-side test at 

150 psi; high-side at 300 psi. 

D. After completion of leak testing, evacuate and charge the system utilizing a 

procedure approved by air conditioning unit's manufacturer. 

E. Install all refrigerant lines located underground or under the building floor in 

PVC conduit sized to contain both the liquid and hot gas lines including required 

insulation. Seal space between piping and PVC conduit at each end of conduit 

to eliminate entry of water. 

15500-19 




3.6 PIPE ASSEMBLY 

A. Sweat Joints in Copper Pipe (other than refrigerant piping): Cut pipe squarely 

to accurate length for full penetration into fittings. Remove burrs from ends, 

clean soldering surface thoroughly, flux, assemble and solder before surfaces 

oxidize. Use approved non-corrosive flux. Use sufficient heat for complete 

penetration of solder and wipe away excess flux and solder. 

B. Solvent Weld Joints in PVC Pipe: Cut pipe squarely to accurate length for full 

penetration into fittings. Remove burrs from ends, clean joining surfaces 

thoroughly and form all joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's 


3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install all valves with the stems or spindle above the horizontal where possible 

and exercise utmost care not to install valves over electrical equipment. 

B. Locate ball valves at all automatic valves, check valves, at all equipment so 

they can be isolated for repairs, at all branch lines connecting mains, and 

elsewhere as shown on drawings. 

C. Locate check valves on the discharge side of all pumps and elsewhere as 

shown on drawings. 

3.8 PIPE HANGER INSTALLATION 

A. Space hangers for horizontal refrigerant piping 6 feet on center. 

B. Space hangers for horizontal copper condensate piping 8 feet on center. 

C. Space hangers for horizontal PVC condensate piping 4 feet on center. 

D. Space hangers for horizontal pipe as follows: 

Plastic pipe 

4' on center maximum 

Copper pipe 

1/2" and smaller 6' on center maximum 

3/4" to 1-1/2" 8' " " " 

Steel pipe 

12' on center maximum 

E. Attach hanger rods to sufficiently rigid structural building members. If hangers 

shall be attached to either the top chord or bottom chord of steel bar joist, 

attach the rods by clamp at the panel points. Do not under any circumstances 

burn or drill holes in either chord. Do not weld either chord. 

F. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices necessary for proper support 

of piping at corners, tops of risers, etc. 

G. Provide galvanized steel shields over pipe insulation at pipe supports. 

15500-20 




3.9 SECONDARY DRAIN PANS 

A. Install secondary drain pans under all air handling units mounted above 

ceilings, where shown on drawings, and/or as designated on equipment 

schedule. Drain pans shall be sized and installed such that the entire unit base 

supports, including return duct on vertical units, shall be within the pan limits. 

B. Run secondary drain line as shown on drawings or provide drain pan with 

water detector to shut down air handling unit when any water enters drain pan. 

Water detector shall be UL listed and approved for use by local authority. 

C. Where local building & mechanical codes permit, provide a float switch in the 

condensate drain trap instead of the secondary drain pan and water detector. 

Connect float switch to air handling unit to shut off unit when water backs up in 

drain trap. 

3.10 SLEEVE AND ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION 

A. Accurately locate and set required sleeves. Where more than one pipe is 

necessarily passed through a single sleeve as to a unit piping enclosure or 

other conditions resulting in larger than 1/8" gap within the sleeve, tightly pack 

space with proper material to form a barrier against sound, vermin, fire, etc. 

B. Fill all spaces between piping and sleeves passing through fire-rated walls, 

floors, or ceilings with material capable of maintaining the fire-resistance rating 

of the wall, floor or ceiling. 

C. Provide properly fitted sheet metal flanges around sheet metal ducts entering 

exposed into finished spaces and/or to cover excessive gaps around ducts 

entering into non-finished spaces. In addition provide metal flashing around 

duct work penetrating exterior walls and seal to provide weather tight system. 

D. Provide escutcheons on all finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or 

insulated, pass through floors, walls or ceilings, except in boiler, utility or 

equipment rooms. Fasten escutcheons securely to pipe or pipe covering. 

3.11 HVAC DUCT WORK 

A. Install all duct work in accordance with SMACNA standards. Install extractors 

and air balance dampers in all branch take offs including take offs to supply 

diffusers. Paint inside of diffusers and duct visible through diffusers flat black. 

B. Support duct from building structure with straps, rods, or angles as detailed in 

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" as published by 

SMACNA. Horizontal and diagonal joist bridging shall not be considered part of 

building structure for duct supporting purposes. Where joist are located too far 

apart for duct support or duct runs are parallel to joist, provide angles between 

joist designed to support duct without sagging. 

C. Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams in ductwork in accordance 

with SMACNA standards regardless of pressure and seal class. Pressure test 

all ductwork in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test 

15500-21 




Manual" and provide test results in a report form for approval by the Engineer 

prior to installing duct insulation. 

D. Fabricate and install fiberglass return air and transfer air duct system in 

accordance with the latest edition of "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction 

Standards", SMACNA, for 2" W.G. static pressure and 2,000 fpm velocity. 

Furthermore, closure systems for longitudinal seams and transverse joints shall 

be in accordance with procedure necessary to comply with Section III, 

CLOSURES. Joint sealing shall be made with glass fabric and mastic in 

accordance with local codes. 

E. Install flexible ducts with a minimum run and with a minimum of bends. No run 

shall exceed 12 *8 for [DCSB]* feet for diffusers and *3 feet for VAV boxes and 

FTUs and bends shall have a minimum radius of 1-1/2 times the diameter of the 

duct measured from the center line. Seal all joints and connections. Connect 

flex duct to spin-in and air distribution fittings using metal clamps; nylon draw 

bands and wire straps will not be accepted. Support flexible duct from building 

structure. Do not lay on light fixtures or ceiling. Flexible duct sizes shall be as 

noted on drawings. *Transitions for flexible duct size shown and inlet 

connections for VAV boxes and FTUs shall be made at inlet connection. 

F. Install double wall duct work in accordance with duct manufacturer's 

instructions and details. 

G. Make all supply, return and outside air duct connections to air handling units 

with flexible connectors specifically designed for equipment used. 

3.12 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Install fire dampers at all duct penetrations of floors and fire rated walls. Install 

fire dampers as shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions and details. Install fire damper to allow opening and resetting of fire 

damper shutter from the duct access door or opening. 

3.13 BALANCE DAMPERS 

A. Install balance dampers at all branch connections and other locations shown 

on drawings. Install balance dampers at all flex duct connections for diffusers 

except where only one diffuser is connected to branch duct. 

B. Install automatic/motor operated volume dampers where shown on drawings 

and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 


A. Provide wall/ceiling access doors at dampers, valves, air vents, fire damper 

access doors, and like items requiring adjustment or maintenance accessibility 

if they cannot be located over lay-in type ceilings or in attic and mechanical 

rooms. Obtain approval from Architect for location of access doors. 

15500-22 




B. Provide access doors in ducts within arm-reach of fire dampers and located to 

permit opening and resetting fire damper shutter. Locate access doors over 

lay-in type ceilings. Provide ceiling access doors if duct access doors cannot 

be located over lay-in type ceilings. Provide access doors in walls behind 

which duct access doors are located. Obtain approval from Architect for 

location of access doors. 

C. Provide visible markers on finished side of lay-in type ceilings to indicate 

locations of duct access doors, valves, adjustable dampers, air vents, fire 

damper access doors and like items. See Architect for marker type. 

3.15 CONTROLS – GENERAL 

A. Furnish all controls and control wiring to provide for proper performance of 

equipment as noted on drawings. 

B. Install all high voltage (120 V or above) control wiring in EMT conduit. Install 

low voltage control wiring in conduit unless concealed in walls or above finished 

ceilings. Use plenum rated wire above ceilings when used as supply and return 

air plenums. Do not run low voltage control wiring in the same conduit as high 

voltage control or power wiring. 

C. Install room thermostats where shown on drawings and 48" above the floor 

unless otherwise noted on drawings. Program thermostats to run supply fan 

continuously during building occupied periods and in the "auto" mode during 

building unoccupied periods. 

D. Install room temperature sensors where shown on drawings and 48" above the 

floor unless otherwise noted on drawings. 

3.16 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS INSTALLATION 

A. Furnish, fabricate, shop paint, and erect all structural supports and platforms as 

required for all equipment installed in this Work, unless otherwise specified. 

Make these supports and platforms independent of all other equipment 

supports and suspend them from the building structural steel, inserts imbedded 

in concrete slabs, or support them on columns as required by the drawings. 

Attachments to steel bar joists shall be approved by the Architect and must only 

be at panel points. Do not, under any circumstances, burn, drill or weld either 

chord of steel bar joist. 

B. Install galvanized steel supports under vertical air handling units up to 2,000 

cfm to allow installation of return air ducts and access to filters and unit access 

panels. 

C. Prepare and furnish drawing and templates indicating all concrete Work 

required for equipment furnished under this Work. All concrete required will be 

provided by the General Contractor. Provide, at the time concrete foundations, 

bases, or curbs are formed, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the 

various equipment in this Work. Grout all spaces between the equipment base 

and concrete supports. 

15500-23 




3.17 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Install all equipment in accordance to equipment manufacturer's instructions. 

Install all equipment to permit removal of coils, fan shafts and wheels, filters, 

belt guards, sheaves and drives, and all other parts requiring periodic 

replacement or maintenance. 

B. Arrange equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, starters, 

motors and control components, and to clear the openings of swinging and 

overhead doors and of access panels. 

C. Install spring type vibration isolators under air handling units larger than 2,000 

cfm, where shown on drawings, and in hanger rods supporting air handling 

units *including fan terminal units. 

D. Install neoprene inertia pads under floor-mounted air handling units with 

secondary drain pans. 

E. Install neoprene inertia pads under floor-mounted air handling units with 

internal spring isolation. 

F. Install vibration isolation rails between rooftop units and roof curbs where 

scheduled on drawings. 

3.18 WALL LOUVERS 

A. Install outside air intake and exhaust louvers where shown in Arch. drawings. 

Insect screens on air intake louvers shall be made accessible from the building 

side of louver through access doors in duct work or from the outside through 

removable louver frame. Seal all joints weather tight between wall and louver 

frame to prevent leakage. 

3.19 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT 

A. Securely attach manufacturer's nameplate to all equipment giving data as to 

design and operating characteristics. 

B. Securely attach nameplates to all switches, starters, gauges, control devices, 

including thermostats, and similar items, giving the name and number of the 

item of equipment to which it is connected. 

C. Identify all air handling units, heat pump units, compressor/condenser units, 

fans, FTUs, VAV boxes, pumps, control devices and other items of machinery 

or apparatus by stenciled letters. 

D. Identify all piping throughout the building with a legend giving the nature of the 

service and direction of flow. Use characters of sufficient size to be read from 

the floor level below the piping. Place legends and arrows adjacent to each 

change of direction and intermediately as necessary for proper identification 

from reasonable access points. 

15500-24 




E. Attach identification tags on each valve with "S" hooks or chains. Valve tags 

are to contain the valve number, letter, or other required identification. 

3.20 OILING AND SERVICING 

A. Protect all bearings and packing glands during installation. Before the 

equipment is placed in operation, fill all bearings and packing glands with the 

type lubricant recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Prior to final 

acceptance adjust all equipment to operate properly. 

3.21 INSULATION – GENERAL 

A. Use application details in accordance with the insulating material supplier's 

recommendations except where a higher standard is specified herein. Clean 

exterior of all piping and duct work of foreign substances, including moisture, 

prior to application of insulation. Apply insulation to piping and duct work with 

all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids. Replace broken or damaged insulation 

with new insulation and joint material. 

B. Replace or repair all existing insulation disturbed by new work and refinish to 

match adjacent insulation. 

3.22 PIPING INSULATION – GENERAL 

A. Run covering for piping unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. Avoid 

metal-to-metal contact between pipes and hangers. Cover all insulated piping 

exterior to building with banded aluminum jackets. Install and secure all 

aluminum jackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Provide an insert, not less than 6" long, of the same thickness and contour as 

adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish 

jacket, on piping 2" or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support 

points. Use heavy density insulating materials suitable for the specified 

temperature range and strong enough to prevent crushing. Cover fittings, 

valves, irregular surfaces, etc., with same insulation specified for piping 

including jacket. Cut jacket to fit without wrinkles or folds. 

3.23 DUCT WORK INSULATION 

A. Insulate all sheet metal supply air, transfer air, and return air duct work, except 

those specified for acoustic duct liner or as pre-insulated double wall ducts, 

located in concealed spaces with flexible external insulation. 

B. Insulate backs and necks of all diffusers and return grilles with flexible external 

insulation. 

C. Insulate all sheet metal supply air and return air duct work located in areas 

exposed to view whether areas are air conditioned or not, and return air plenum 

for vertical air handling units with semi-rigid external insulation. 

15500-25 




D. Lap all joints a minimum of 2" with glass cloth and embed glass fabric in coat of 

white mastic and cover glass fabric with white mastic (Duct tape shall not be 

used). Adhere insulation to duct with adhesive applied with a 2" wide brush at 

8" on centers. On ducts over 24 " on any side, additionally attach insulation to 

duct work on bottom and sides with Graham pin studs and speed washer or 

stick clips placed 18" on center each way. 

E. Insulate return air plenum on vertical air handling units with semi-rigid 

insulation. Extend end of external insulation at least 12" past the end of the 

internal duct liner. 

3.24 AIR SYSTEM TEST AND BALANCE 

A. The Test and Balance (TAB) Agency, completely independent from Contractors 

installing work under this specification section, shall perform all test and 

balance work in accordance with the recommendations of the Associated Air 

Balance Council, and after the entire mechanical system has been completed 

and is in full working order. 

B. TAB Agency shall contact the Architect and provide the schedule for TAB work 

at least one week prior to start of TAB work to afford the Architect the 

opportunity to visit the job site during the TAB work. 

C. TAB Agency shall make provisions in the contract to meet the Architect at the 

job site after the TAB report has been submitted to spot check at least 10% of 

the TAB tested points. TAB Agency shall furnish equipment and TAB 

technician to complete these spot checks in the presence of the Engineer. 

D. The following organizations are approved for Test and Balance work for this 

project: Environmental Balance Corp., First Coast Test & Balance, Holistic Test 

& Balance, Perfect Balance, Inc., TABCO, Thermal Systems Balancing, Inc. 

and Tisdale Air Balance. 

E. Take responsibility for the following: 

1. Place all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment 

into full operation and maintain operation during each working day of the 

TAB Agency. 

2. Make any changes required for correct balance, as recommended by the 

TAB Agency, at no additional cost to the Owner. Such changes may 

encompass but are not limited to pulleys, belts, duct work, dampers, or 

the addition of dampers and access doors. 

3. Furnish TAB Agency with full set of applicable shop drawings, submittal 

data, and manufacturer's performance data. 

F. TAB Agency shall complete all following specified work: 

1. Mark all duct traverse points and other information on set of reproducible 

HVAC drawings. Assign ID numbers to all diffusers and grilles, note ID 

numbers on reproducible HVAC drawing, and use ID numbers in TAB 

report. 

2. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. 

Ensure the following: 

15500-26 




a. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 

b. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 

c. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical 

equipment. 

d. Final filters are clean and in place. 

e. Correct fan rotation. 

f. Duct systems are clean of debris. 

g. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 

h. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 

i. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 

j. Air outlets are installed and connected. 

k. Duct system leakage has been minimized. 

3. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services 

to the Engineer. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical 

systems or conditions which prevent system balance. Beginning of 

balance work means acceptance of existing conditions. 

4. Adjust all air systems to the design values. 

5. Test and record all actual motor currents and note corresponding 

nameplate full load amperes. 

6. Test and adjust rpm of all blowers, fans, and similar air handling devices 

to plus or minus 5% of design quantities. Make pitot tube traverses of all 

main exhaust, supply, and return ducts and obtain air flow of each fan. 

Test and record each system’s starting pressure, suction and discharge. 

Test and adjust system for design recirculated and outside air flows. 

7. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 5% of design 

requirements and identify and list each grille, diffuser and register. Use 

manufacturer's ratings on all equipment for required calculations. 

8. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed conditions. 

9. Permanently mark settings of dampers and other adjustment devices 

allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 

10. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been 

disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. 

11. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing 

access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring 

thermostats to specified settings. 

12. Upon completion of test and balance work, insert all data, including copy 

of marked-up HVAC drawing, into a complete typewritten report and 

submit six (6) copies of this report to the Architect. 

3.25 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 

A. After final acceptance of all Work and occupancy of building, provide service to 

make system adjustments to suit conditions created by the occupancy; instruct 

Owner's operating personnel in operation adjustment and maintenance 

procedures of system components, acquaint them with locations and functions 

of valves, control devices, etc., in the system, and instruct them in the operation 

of the HVAC control system. 

B. The actual time of instruction shall be as required to fully prepare Owner's 

operating personnel to properly operate and maintain the systems as designed 

and installed but shall not be less than one (1) day for all equipment location 

and adjustments and *four (4) days of three (3) hour periods each day for BAS. 

15500-27 




3.26 CLEANING AND RUBBISH 

A. During the Work, keep the premises clear of rubbish created as a result of the 

Work. Protect and prevent unnecessary induction of dirt and thoroughly clean 

all equipment used for temporary heat and/or ventilation. 

B. Use and maintain adequate filters in all fan coil equipment used for temporary 

heat and/or ventilation. Replace with new filters after construction and before 

units are placed in service. Close all air duct openings to effectively prevent the 

entrance of dust and construction debris during construction. 

C. On completion of the Work, remove all rubbish and debris resulting from the 

Work and dispose of same. Thoroughly clean and leave in a satisfactory 

condition for use all equipment, pipe, fixtures, duct work, etc. 

3.27 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. The Architect will furnish prints of the mechanical drawings as issued for this 

contract. Use these prints to indicate accurately and neatly any deviation in the 

actual installation from the drawings as issued. At the completion of the job, 

deliver the marked-up drawings to the Architect for a permanent record of the 

exact location of all equipment, pipe runs, etc. as incorporated in the job. 

3.28 COMPLETE SYSTEMS 

A. Leave all systems completely operative in all details and in satisfactory working 

condition, as determined by the Architect. Furnish and install as part of this 

contract all apparatus and material obviously a part of the systems and 

necessary for their operation. 

B. Coordinate work specified herein and shown on mechanical drawings and 

insure completion in a timely and proper manner. Prior to requesting 

"Substantial Completion Inspection", provide the Architect with letter stating all 

requirements of this section have been met. Letter shall contain itemized list 

indicating each item has been personally checked by the Superintendent and 

that it is ready for inspection. With letter, provide reports, schedules, etc., as 

required. This section is intended as a checklist to insure items specified are 

properly installed and to insure against premature "Substantial Completion 

Inspection" requests. 

C. Check air distribution systems and insure systems are properly tested and 

balanced. Check filters and, if dirty, install new filters in units with disposable 

type filters and remove, wash and reinstall filters in units with permanent type 

filters. Dirty filters shall be defined as pressure drop exceeding 0.5" W.G. 

Provide one additional set of disposable and/or metal, washable, permanent, 

type filters as applicable for each unit. Lubricate fans, motors, and all other 

moving equipment requiring lubrication. Provide a maintenance schedule 

listing each piece of equipment requiring lubrication, points to be lubricated, 

product and device to be used, and frequency of lubrication required. 

D. Check and insure all equipment is properly installed, mounted as specified or 

shown and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. At equipment 

15500-28 




start-up, insure controls, power wiring, and interlocks are complete. Check 

alignment of motors and drives. Verify overload heaters are properly sized and 

installed. Check for proper motor rotation. Provide specified system 

identification. 

E. Provide for thorough cleaning of installation. Cleaning shall include removing 

temporary covers; removing adhesive applied stickers except those giving 

specific maintenance instructions which were intended to remain on equipment; 

removing cord and wire affixed tags; removing paint, coating and adhesive 

spatters; and vacuuming inside air handling unit plenums. 

F. Provide for touch-up painting of factory finished equipment. Touch-up painting 

is intended to cover minor dents, scratches, and scuff marks. Prepare surface 

by light sanding or remove rust with chemical compounds designed for 

application and coat surface with primer followed by matching top coat. Where 

equipment has major surface damage and/or rusting, refinish entire equipment 

surfaces as directed by the Architect. 

G. Provide all specified operation and maintenance manuals. Obtain letter from 

Owner stating specified operating instructions have been completed. 


15500-29 



SECTION 16000 

ELECTRICAL 



A. The General Provisions of the Contract, Division 1, including the General Requirements, 

Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions, along with the General 

Requirements, are hereby made a part of this Section as if fully repeated herein. 

B. Scope of Work: Included under this section of these specifications shall include complete 

electrical systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein. This work shall 

include: 

1. Temporary electric service and distribution for construction purpose. 

2. Permanent building service entrance equipment and feeder distribution. 

3. Trench excavation, pumping, backfilling and compaction for all underground 

electrical work. 

4. Building panelboards and branch circuits to electrical devices, lighting fixtures, and 

other electrically operated equipment. 

5. Empty conduits and outlets for telephone and computer systems. 

6. Coordination 

1.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS: 

A. Prior to start of any work, the successful Contractor shall meet with the Architect to 

determine that no questions remain concerning the intent of the drawings or 

specifications. Contractor shall outline his methods and procedures which will allow the 

Owner to continue to maintain facility functions during execution of this Work and bring 

up for discussion and decision any questions concerning the project. No work shall be 

performed prior to this meeting. The Architect shall set the date, time, and place of 

conference. 


A. Comply with all codes applying to the Work of this contract including but not limited to 

the2007 Florida Building, the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety 

Code, ADA and OSHA, and Florida Life Safety Code 2008 Edition. Obtain information 

on all code restrictions and requirements. In case of conflict between the contract 

documents and a governing code or ordinance, such conflict shall be immediately 

brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution. Extra payment will not be allowed 

for work required by code restrictions except through written agreement with the Owner. 

B. Apply for, obtain, and pay for all required permits and inspection certificates. Final 

payment is contingent upon delivery of such certificates to the Architect. 

C. Although not a State requirement, a minimum of one licensed Journeyman Electrician 

shall be present for every 5 electrical workers on the jobsite throughout the course of 

construction. 

16000-1 



Electrical 

D. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories 

seal. Certificates to this effect shall be furnished to the Architect upon request. 


A. Visit the site and thoroughly inspect conditions affecting the work before submitting bid. 

Assume responsibility for meeting all existing conditions including access and work 

space limitations. 


A. Refer to the general construction drawings which are bound with the drawings of this 

Work for construction details, elevations, etc. Architectural and structural drawings shall 

take precedence over Division 16 drawings (Electrical Drawings). 

B. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications to call for finished Work, tested, and 

ready for operation, and in complete conformance with all applicable codes, rules and 

regulations. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but manifestly necessary for 

the proper installation and operation of the various systems, shall be included in the 

Work and in the proposal, the same as if specified or shown on the drawings. 

C. Specifications and drawings shall be considered as supplementary to each other, 

requiring materials and labor indicated, specified, or implied by either specifications or 

drawings. If any departures from the drawings and specifications are deemed 

necessary, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to 

the Architect for approval. No departures shall be made without prior approval of the 

Architect. 

D. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture or 

type of construction, etc., by proprietary name, make or catalog number shall be 

interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting 

competition. Substitutes may be used subject to compliance with requirements set forth 

herein, and in the General Requirements, Division 1, and as approved by the Architect. 


A. Submit shop drawings, catalog sheets, or other descriptive data with sufficient 

information to establish design, quality and performance. 

B. Manufacturer catalog sheets submitted without specific model numbers indicated will be 

rejected. Data shall describe apparatus, equipment, panels, fixtures, and other items 

requiring descriptive literature. Submittals shall include the following: 

1. Light fixtures 

2. Panelboards 

3. Safety switches 

4. Transformers 

5. Wiring devices 

6. Occupancy sensors 

7. Time switches 

8. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 

16000-2 



Electrical 

C. Review of the submittals does not grant the contractor leave to proceed in error. The 

requirements of the drawings and specifications must be followed and are not waived or 

superceded in any way by the submittal review. 

D. Submittal data may be submitted for review and 'revised and resubmitted' only two times 

without cost to the contractor. Each subsequent submittal shall be reviewed for a flat fee 

of $100.00 payable to the reviewing engineer. 

1.7 MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Collect and neatly retain maintenance and service data supplied with equipment 

furnished and installed under this contract until job completion, at which time deliver to 

the Architect for inclusion in the Maintenance Manual. All such data must be properly 

identified as for equipment served. 

B. Keep one set of prints current of any changes or variations by marking prints in a legible 

manner; and upon completion of project, deliver prints to the Architect. Do not make 

changes without prior approval of the Architect. 

1.8 TEMPORARY ELECTRIC SERVICE 

A. Provide complete temporary system of power and lighting wiring for use during 

construction and for testing of equipment. Comply with OSHA and NEC including 

personnel ground-fault protection requirements. 

1.9 COORDINATION - GENERAL 

A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Review all project drawings and coordinate all 

work with general contractor and different trades prior to installing any work so that 

interferences between electrical work and ducts, piping, equipment, architectural and 

structural work will be avoided. Do not install conduits, boxes and fittings in spaces 

required for ductwork or piping. 

B. Furnish all necessary offsets in raceways, fittings, etc., required to properly install work 

so as to take up minimum space. Install all equipment to provide code required 'working 

space'. Furnish and install all materials required to accomplish this without additional 

cost. 

C. In case interference develops, the Architect will decide which trade work must be 

relocated regardless of which was installed first. Damage from interference or rework 

caused by inadequate coordination with other trades shall be rectified without additional 

cost. 

D. Within 30 days following award of contract, report to the Architect in writing all real or 

potential errors, ambiguities and/or conflicts on electrical work or between trades. Those 

reported after 30 days, except as a result of unforeseen circumstances, shall be 

resolved at the discretion of the Architect. Report conflicts resulting from progress of 

work to the Architect immediately. 

1.10 COORDINATION - ELECTRICAL / MECHANICAL 

A. Unless specifically required otherwise, all motors, integral starters, control and 

monitoring devices, timers, relays, pilot devices and other required control components 

will be furnished under Division 15. 

16000-3 



Electrical 

B. Unless specifically required otherwise, furnish and install disconnect switches, fuses and 

power wiring connections to all equipment as indicated on drawings or as specifically 

required by the equipment manufacturer. 

C. The mechanical contractor shall furnish and install all heating, ventilation and air 

conditioning equipment, including all control devices and control wiring. 

D. Unless specifically required otherwise, make all power wiring connections to all water 

heaters, pumps, machinery, appliances and other electrically operated equipment as 

indicated on drawings or as required. Furnish and install disconnect switches and 

starters as indicated on drawings, except for items furnished with integral disconnect 

switches and/or starters. 

E. Install and connect all separate disconnect switches and line voltage control devices 

furnished with the equipment but not factory mounted and connected on the equipment. 

F. Review shop drawings and verify final electrical characteristics and wiring before roughin 

of power feeds to any equipment to be provided. When electrical data on shop 

drawings differs from contemplated design, make necessary adjustments to wiring, 

disconnect, and branch-circuit protection for equipment actually installed. 

1.11 WORKING CLEARANCES 

A. Working clearances around electrical equipment requiring service shall comply with NEC 

requirements. Coordinate and verify clearances from equipment and work furnished by 

other trades. Should there be any apparent violations of clearance requirements, notify 

the Architect before proceeding with connection or placement of equipment. Rework 

caused by inadequate coordination shall be rectified at no extra cost. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. All materials used in this project shall be new, unless otherwise noted, and listed by the 

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as conforming to its standards where such standards 

have been established. These materials shall bear the U.L. label. 

B. Where materials, equipment, apparatus or other products are specified by manufacturer, 

brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish standards of 

desired design or quality and shall be basis of bid. Alternatives may be submitted to 

Architect for consideration. 

2.2 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT 

A. Panelboards shall be molded case circuit breaker type with completely dead fronts 

enclosed in code gauge, galvanized sheet steel cabinets with adequate wiring gutters 

top, bottom and sides. Neutral bus bars shall be 100% rated, insulated for panelboards 

shown with neutral. Front trim shall contain hinged door with keyed lock and catch. 

Door shall be provided with plastic enclosed circuit directory. Upon completion of 

installation, circuit directory shall be typewritten indicating usage and location of circuits 

as indicated on drawings. 

16000-4 



Electrical 

B. Circuit breakers shall be single or multi-pole molded case, of common handle, common 

trip without handle ties, thermal magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, for manual and 

automatic operation. Refer to schedules on drawings for details regarding panel types, 

capacity, interrupting rating, mounting and other information. Circuit breakers which are 

indicated to serve permanently connected appliances such as water heaters, 

dishwashers, etc., shall be capable of being locked in open position. 

2.3 SAFETY SWITCHES 

A. Safety switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, general duty type in sheet steel 

enclosure, NEMA-1 for interior locations and NEMA-3R for exterior locations as required 

for rain tight installations, with door cover interlock. Fuse type and size shall be as 

indicated or as specifically required by the equipment manufacturer. 

2.4 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 

A. Dry type transformers shall be general purpose, totally enclosed, indoor type of KVA size 

shown on drawings and shall be provided with standard universal primary voltage taps. 

Sound levels shall not exceed NEMA standards for the KVA sizes specified. 

B. Electrical characteristics shall generally be 480V, 3 delta primary, 208/120V, 3 wye 

secondary, *or 480V, 1 primary, 240/120V, 1 secondary, with grounded neutral, as 

indicated on drawings. 

C. Temperature classification for 112.5KVA and larger shall be 80 degrees C temperature 

rise. 

D. Load rating shall be continuous at full nameplate rating in 40 degree C ambient. 

2.5 CONDUIT 

A. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) with set screw fittings shall generally be used for building 

interior except where exposed to physical damage, unless otherwise indicated or 

specified herein. 

B. Rigid or intermediate metal conduit with galvanized fittings and hardware shall be used 

on building exterior where exposed to weather. 

C. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (schedule 40 PVC) shall be used underground and in concrete 

slabs. Minimum PVC size shall be 1”. Floor penetrations shall be rigid galvanized ell's. 

D. Flexible conduit shall be used for final connections to motors, appliances and vibrating 

equipment. 

E. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) shall not be used. 

F. In locations where exterior devices are connected to an interior device via a common 

raceway, provide silicone sealant in conduit at junction box in interior and exterior 

locations after branch circuit wiring has been installed. Sealant shall be applied to inhibit 

air flow in raceway between interior and exterior device locations. 

2.6 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS 

16000-5 



Electrical 

A. Voltage surge suppressor shall be UL 1449 Listed, and shall meet or exceed maximum 

fault current indicated for panelboards on which installed. Advanced Protection 

Technologies in NEMA-3R enclosure with integral disconnect model #TE/4HPS/DS/*3R 

for 480V/3 /4W services or #TE/2HPS/DS/3R for 208V/3 /4W services, or approval equal 

by, Liebert, or Intermatic only. 

B. Provide all wiring/conduit connections in accordance with manufacturer's 


2.7 CONDUCTORS 

A. All conductors shall be copper and shall not be smaller than #12 except where otherwise 

noted. Conductors smaller than #8 shall be solid. Conductors #8 and larger shall be 

stranded. 

B. Conductor insulation shall generally be XHHW or THHN as required for dry, damp or wet 

locations per NEC. Conductors subjected to higher ambient temperatures shall be 

derated in accordance with NEC. 

2.8 OUTLET BOXES 

A. All outlet boxes, extensions, and cover frames shall be galvanized sheet steel for 

concealed locations or cast metal for exposed locations unless otherwise noted. Boxes 

shall be 1 1/2" deep, minimum, and shall be sized to accommodate the installed conduit, 

conductors and device. Boxes to which fixtures are installed shall have studs and straps 

to support fixture weight. Where more than two switches are located side by side, outlet 

box shall be multi-ganged type as required for switches to be mounted under single 

cover plate. Provide divider plate between each device within multi-gang outlet. 

B. Boxes for installation in concrete block wall construction shall be gang type, 3 1/2" deep 

for switch devices and 4" square by 1 1/2" deep, with 1 1/4" single and two gang square 

corner extension covers for receptacle and junction purposes. Boxes for installation in 

brick wall construction shall be gang type, 3 1/2" deep. Boxes installed in plastered 

walls shall be 4" square by 1 1/2" deep, with 3/4" single and two gang plaster covers. All 

boxes shall have internal mounting ears or threaded tappings. 

C. Boxes for installation in fire rated walls or ceilings shall be 2”x4” or 4” round metal type. 

Spacing shall be a minimum of 24” apart. 4” square boxes shall be permitted provided 

they are equipped with a 2”x4” extension ring and spacing is a minimum of 24” on 

center. Aggregate area of the openings provided for the boxes shall not exceed 100 

square inches per 100 square feet of wall space. 

2.9 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 

A. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge galvanized sheet steel and 

fitted with screw covers held in place with corrosion resistant machine screws. 

B. Provide boxes where noted on drawings or where necessary to facilitate conductor 

pulling and splicing. Splicing of conductors is to be avoided as much as possible with 

continuous lengths being preferred. Box sizes shall conform to sizes required by NEC or 

as indicated on drawings. 

2.10 WIRING DEVICES 

16000-6 



Electrical 

A. All wiring devices shall be commercial grade and product of one manufacturer 

throughout project except as otherwise noted. Device color shall *match existing. *be 

determined in shop drawing stage and shall be as directed by architect 

B. Wall switches shall be 20 ampere, 120-277V, A.C., toggle handle, quiet type, with side 

or back wiring terminals. Switches shall be single or multi-pole as indicated on 

drawings. Pilot light type switches shall be provided with red lighted handle which 

illuminates when switch is 'on'. 

C. Wall occupancy sensors shall be wall mounted combination ultrasonic and passive 

infrared type, with integral on/off manual switch. Occupancy sensor shall be line voltage 

and intrinsically grounding type. Manufacturer shall be Sensor switch model # WSD- 

PDT *color I/W/G/A or approved equal. Open area and Corridor occupancy sensors 

shall be ceiling mounted combination ultrasonic and passive infrared type. Sensor shall 

be equipped with automatic gain control thereby allowing self calibration. Connect for 

use via wall switch generally as indicated on drawings. Manufacturer shall be Sensor 

Switch model # CM-PDT-10/CM-BoxPlate with PP-20 power pack, or approved equal by 

Hubbel or Wattstopper. Contractor shall coordinate location in field to maintain 5’ clear 

between ceiling mounted sensor and HVAC supply grilles. 

D. Duplex receptacles shall be straight blade, 20 ampere 125V, A.C., of grounding type, 

with side or back wiring terminals. 

E. GFI type receptacles shall be equipped with integral safety mechanism to remove power 

from device upon GFI component failure (UL943 compliant) with 'test' and 'reset' buttons 

shall be provided where indicated. GFI type receptacles shall be provided where 

indicated on drawings, series wiring to enable GFI protection for non-GFI type 

receptacles shall not be allowed. 

F. Device plates shall be rigid thermoplastic type, white in color for all flush installed outlet 

boxes in finished spaces. Weatherproof devices shall be equipped with rain tight in use 

cover. Surface mounted device outlets shall be fitted with appropriate sheet steel or cast 

metal cover plates to match device and box. Nylon coverplates are not allowed. 

G. Special purpose outlets shall be as indicated on drawings and have matching cover 

plate. 

2.11 LIGHTING FIXTURES 

A. Furnish and install all lighting fixtures as shown on drawings and specified in fixture 

schedule. The fixture schedule is intended as a guide for selection. Unless otherwise 

noted, fixtures of other manufacturers will be acceptable if of similar design and 

characteristics, subject to approval. 

B. Although not specifically shown or specified, all light fixtures shall be provided with all 

necessary optional accessories and mounting hardware for installation as indicated or 

required. 

C. Electronic ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be UL Listed Class P, Type 1, flicker-free, 

full light output type and meeting the applicable requirements of the FCC, IEEE and 

ANSI with power factor not less than 90%, crest factor 1.5 maximum, frequency not less 

than 25,000 hertz, THD less than 10% and sound rating Class A. Ballasts shall be 

specifically designed for use with the type lamps indicated. *Ballasts for use with 

compact fluorescent lamps shall be provided with ‘end of life' protection to prevent 

16000-7 



Electrical 

ballast operation upon lamp failure. Ballast warranty shall be 5 years minimum. All 

fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with integral disconnect which removes power to 

ballast. 

D. Ballast for HID fixtures shall be high power factor type selected for type and wattage of 

lamp supplied. 

E. All recessed lighting fixtures installed in insulated ceilings or ceilings which abut an attic 

space shall be 'IC' rated, gasketed and sealed to prevent air leakage into the conditioned 

space, or provided with a sealed box (min 1/2" thick gypsum wall board, preformed 

polymeric vapor barrier, or other air tight assembly manufactured for this purpose) and 

maintaining required clearances of not less than 1/2" for combustible material and not 

less than 3" from insulation material. 

2.12 LAMPS 

A. Furnish and install one complete set of lamps for all installed fixtures as designated in 

fixture schedule, on drawings or specified herein. All lamps shall be of proper design to 

fit specific fixture indicated. To ensure uniform lighting and color, all lamps of the same 

type shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 

B. Incandescent lamps shall be rated 120 volt with type and wattage as scheduled. 

C. Fluorescent lamps shall be color and size as scheduled, and designed for operation with 

the fixture ballast. Energy efficient type lamps shall be specifically approved for 

operation with the specified ballast. 

2.13 TIME SWITCHES 

A. Time switch controls shall be multi-pole, single throw, rated 20 amperes per pole 

(minimum), with astronomic dial properly selected for latitude of installation and 16 hour 

(minimum) spring reserve carry-over in the event of power failure. Time switch shall be 

installed in NEMA-1 surface enclosure unless otherwise noted. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Place all sleeves, inserts, conduit hangers, etc. as construction progresses to avoid any 

unnecessary cutting of structural members. Cooperate with other contractors in location 

of electrical outlets that may conflict with location of other equipment. 

B. Obtain authorization from the Architect for any necessary cutting of building structure to 

facilitate installation of this work and do not proceed until authorization has been 

received. Limit necessary cutting and patching to the minimum size required for 

installation of conduit or apparatus. 

3.2 TRENCH EXCAVATION, PUMPING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION 

A. Excavate, back-fill and compact all trenches required for underground electrical work. 

Maintain trenches free of water until installation is complete and provide all necessary 

shoring. 

16000-8 



Electrical 

B. Contractor shall field verify all existing underground utilities and avoid damage to same. 

Where existing utilities are damaged, the contractor shall be responsible for all repairs or 

replacement. 

C. Back-fill with loose, dry granular material in 6-inch lifts and thoroughly compact each lift. 

Dispose of all surplus material and rock as directed by the Architect. Grade the surface 

to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding in neat condition as approved by the 

Architect. 

D. Back-fill all trenches passing under foundations with concrete to the underside of the 

foundation and at a 2:1 slope away from each side of the foundation. Back-fill all 

trenches that are parallel and deeper than foundations with concrete to a point that will 

place the top of the concrete on a 2:1 slope away from the foundation bottom. Do not 

back-fill trenches until required inspections are completed. 

E. Repair or replace all topsoil, shrubbery, sod, sidewalks, streets, walls, etc. disturbed by 

the excavation, backfilling or pumping to the satisfaction of the Architect. Repair 

sidewalks in complete blocks; partial patching will not be accepted. 

3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING 

A. Provide grounding electrode conductor for electric service equipment sized and 

connected in accordance with NEC. 

B. Bond equipment such as metallic housing and feeder metallic conduits to grounding 

conductor. Use grounding bushings, on service conduit and at other points where 

grounding continuity is broken. 

C. Although not specifically indicated or required by code, provide insulated green 

equipment grounding conductor for all feeders and branch circuits. 

D. Provide a bonding jumper for any equipment, motor, fixture or device to which current 

carrying conductors are connected that is not bonded directly to the grounded system. 

Connect bonding jumper to approved lugs and grounding conduit bushings or clamps. 

All non-metallic conduit shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 

E. All grounding or bonding conductors shall be sized as required by NEC, or as herein 

specified, and shall be bare copper or TW insulated, with green coding. 

3.4 RACEWAYS 

A. Follow routing for conduit installation described on drawings as nearly as possible. 

Routing layout, however, is diagrammatical and where changes are necessary as a 

result of structural conditions, apparatus, or other causes, routing will have to be 

changed to meet these conditions. Conduit risers and offsets are not indicated on 

drawings but are intended to be installed as required. 

B. Run conduit required to be exposed parallel or perpendicular to the walls, ceilings, or 

structural members and provide supports as required by NEC. In addition, install 

supports as required to form a secure and firm installation. Supports shall be galvanized 

pipe straps, hangers or wall brackets. Firmly support concealed conduit at the structure 

and install so as to prevent any vibration against structure, pipe or duct work. 

16000-9 



Electrical 

C. Fit conduit installed in concrete or secured to structural members that pass through 

expansion joints constructed in the building with expansion fittings, complete with copper 

bonding jumper. 

D. All metallic conduit terminating in outlet, junction or pull boxes and cabinets must 

terminate with bushing and double locknuts except exposed cast boxes, where they may 

be omitted. Conduit sizes 1 1/4" and above shall have insulating fiber bushings with 

double locknuts. Grounding type bushings must be used at points where grounding 

continuity is broken and at service equipment. 

E. Fit all empty conduit systems with suitable nylon pull-string and blank off to prevent 

entrance of foreign matter until conductors are installed. 

F. At motor connections, flexible connections, or connections subject to vibration, use 

flexible galvanized conduit with PVC outer jacket with grounding conductor. 

G. Conduit shall not be smaller than ½" trade size and must be sized to accept conductors 

indicated. 

3.5 WIRING 

A. No wiring shall be installed until the required raceway system including junction, outlet 

and device boxes is completed. Install wiring before painting begins and protect against 

being painted. 

B. Branch circuit sizes are noted on drawings and must be continuous without reduction in 

size throughout their length except where connecting to fixtures or devices. 

C. Branch circuit wire sizes shall be increased as required where long runs will cause 

excessive voltage drop per NEC. 

D. Wire circuits as described or indicated on drawings to achieve a connected load as 

scheduled. Should any change be necessary, it must be brought to the Architect's 

attention. 

3.6 BOXES 

A. The location of outlets on drawings is to be considered as approximate only inasmuch as 

outlets are to be centered in blocks, panels, or other modular units. Be familiar with 

requirements of other trades as well as the building in general to become aware of 

various materials and finished surfaces in which outlets are to be installed. 

B. Install boxes square and plumb with receptacle and junction boxes in a vertical position. 

Cover all boxes for future use or junction purposes with blank plates. 

C. Boxes in exterior locations shall be cast metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs. 

Securely fasten boxes to building surfaces. 

3.7 PANELBOARDS 

A. Panelboards shall not be installed under any ducts, piping or other foreign equipment up 

to the structural ceiling as per code requirements. Where it appears that this condition 

will exist, the contractor shall notify the Architect immediately for resolution before 

16000-10 



Electrical 

proceeding with the installation. Any rework caused by the lack of timely notification and 

coordination shall be provided without additional cost. 

3.8 ACCESS PANELS 

A. Provide ceiling access panels for equipment, devices, boxes and other like items 

requiring adjustment or maintenance accessibility if they are not located over lay-in type 

ceilings or are not otherwise accessible. Obtain approval from Architect for type and 

location of access panels. 

3.9 WIRING DEVICES 

A. Where indicated, gang devices together in common boxes with device straps bonded to 

metallic system or separate grounding conductor. 

B. Wiring device mounting heights shall be as follows, unless otherwise noted or required: 

1. Light switches and controls- 48" above floor to top 

2. Receptacles- 16" above floor to bottom 

3. Telephone and computer outlets- 16" above floor to bottom 

3.10 IDENTIFICATION LABELS 

A. Provide identification labels for each motor controller, safety switch, panelboard, 

contactor, time switch, control device, and circuit breaker. Labels shall be laminated, 

phenolic strips 1/16" thick and engraved to show black letters on white background not 

less than 1/4" high. *Emergency equipment and control device labels shall be provided 

per code on all emergency equipment. Labels shall be consist of white letters on red 

background. Where brackets are not provided, labels shall be mounted with screws, or 

approved adhesive. 

B. Where control apparatus is installed on or immediately adjacent to equipment, labels are 

not required. 

C. Provide UL approved arc-flash hazard marking on front cover (or other clearly visible 

location) of all electrical equipment as required by the NEC 110. 

3.11 LIGHTING FIXTURES 

A. All light fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation 

instructions or recommendations. 

B. Connect single-connected fixtures, surface or stem hung, with heat resistant fixture wire. 

Connect multiple-connected fluorescent fixtures, surface or stem hung, with type THHN 

heat resistant thermoplastic wire of a size indicated for branch circuit. 

C. Support fixtures to be recessed in readily removable tile ceilings (lay-in type) from the T- 

bar tile support and connect to remote mounted 4" square junction boxes with approved 

six foot long, 3/8" flexible conduit 'fixture whip' with grounding conductor bonded 

between conduit system and fixture. 

D. Lay-in type light fixtures installed in fire rated ceilings shall be independently supported 

per UL requirements. 

16000-11 



Electrical 

E. Upon project completion and just prior to delivering project to the Owner, clean all 

fixtures and remove all instruction tags. 

3.12 LAMPS 

A. Do not install full set of lamps until specific permission of the Architect has been 

obtained. Temporary lamps may be installed in permanent fixtures for construction 

purposes, but they must be replaced with new lamps when directed. 

3.13 TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER CONDUIT SYSTEM 

A. Install conduits, outlet boxes and backboards as shown on drawings. Conduit shall be 

as previously specified, with 3/4" as the minimum size. Provide all conduits with pullwire. 

Backboards shall be 3/4" plywood painted light gray with fire resistant paint. 

B. Wall outlets shall be 4" square by 1 1/2" deep with single gang extension covers and 

covered with blank specified plates. *Floor outlets shall be floor outlet boxes as 

previously specified. 

C. Coordinate with local telephone company and verify routing and termination point of 

building telephone service entry conduits. 

D. Provide telephone service entry conduits and backboard with receptacles and ground 

conductor in accordance with telephone company requirements. 

E. Provide #6 stranded, green insulated, ground conductor from backboard to the electrical 

service ground and/or other ground sources approved and verified by the telephone 

company. 

F. Provide grounding electrode conductor at telephone service entry sized and connected 

in accordance with NEC. Ground rod shall be minimum 10' in length and 3/4" in 

diameter. 

3.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Make all final power feed connections to starters and/or motorized equipment installed 

by heating and air conditioning and plumbing contractors as indicated or required. Refer 

to Electrical sections of the other contractors' specifications for further information. 

B. For air handling equipment with separate 'field installed' heater unit, provide fuse block 

with fuses, wiring and power connections for fan motor tapped to unit disconnect switch. 

C. Contractor shall assume that all circuit breakers indicated for 'hermetic refrigerate motorcompressor' 

A/C equipment are the wrong size. The contractor shall field verify and 

provide ‘HACR' type circuit breaker sized for 'maximum-overcurrent-protection' in 

accordance with the nameplate data for the equipment actually supplied. 

D. Verify all equipment for service and characteristics provided prior to rough-in and 

connection. Provide a grounding conductor for all equipment connected with flexible 

conduit and bond to conduit system and metallic frame of equipment. 

E. Be responsible for securing and installing proper insulated conductors required for 

equipment of higher temperature range beyond that of specified branch circuit type. 


16000-12

city of labelle membrane water treatment facility ... - DN Higgins, Inc.

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?